498650
150
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/166
Pagina verder
AVR-2313
INTEGRATED NETWORK AV RECEIVER
Owners Manual
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
DVD
I
n
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug
from the wall socket outlet.
The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit
and must be within easy access by the user.
CAUTION:
HOT SURFACE. DO NOT TOUCH.
The top surface over the internal heat sink may become hot
when operating this product continuously.
Do not touch hot areas, especially around the “Hot surface
mark” and the top panel.
Hot
surface
mark
•DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We declare under our sole responsibility that this product, to which this
declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards:
EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN61000-3-2 and EN61000-3-3.
Following the provisions of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC, the EC regulation 1275/2008 and its frame work
Directive 2009/125/EC for Energy-related Products (ErP).
A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING:
This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can
be reused. Please dispose of any materials in accordance
with the local recycling regulations.
When discarding the unit, comply with local rules or
regulations.
Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated
but disposed of in accordance with the local regulations
concerning battery disposal.
This product and the supplied accessories, excluding the
batteries, constitute the applicable product according to the
WEEE directive.
DENON EUROPE
Division of D&M Germany GmbH
An der Kleinbahn 18, Nettetal,
D-41334 Germany
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
10. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
11. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
14. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
DVD
II
n
NOTES ON USE
WARNINGS
•Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.
•Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
•Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust.
•Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time.
•Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
•Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
•Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit.
•Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.
•Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings
with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths or curtains.
•Naked flame sources such as lighted candles should not be placed on
the unit.
•Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.
•Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids.
•Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit.
•Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.
•When the switch is in the OFF (STANDBY) position, the equipment is not
completely switched off from MAINS.
•The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power
supply is easily accessible.
•Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in places
with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
n CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
z z
z
Wall
z
z For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined
space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
•More than 0.3 m is recommended.
•Do not place any other equipment on this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
DVD
1
Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Getting started
Basic version ············································································4
Connections ··················································································· 5
Important information ··································································· 5
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device ······································7
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device ·································12
Connecting an external power amplifier ····································· 22
Connecting an external control device ········································23
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ········································24
Connecting the power cord ························································25
Setup ····························································································26
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup) ··········································26
Making the network settings (Network) ····································· 32
Playback (Basic operation) ·························································33
Important information ································································· 33
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player ···································· 34
Playing Super Audio CD ······························································34
Playing a CD player ····································································· 35
Playing an iPod············································································35
Playing a USB memory device ····················································38
Listening to FM broadcasts ························································41
Network contents ·······································································52
Listening to internet radio ···························································52
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS ·································55
Using online services ··································································59
Convenient functions ··································································65
AirPlay function ···········································································69
Selecting a listening mode (Sound Mode) ·······························71
Selecting a listening mode··························································71
Advanced version ································································77
Installation/connection/setup of speakers (Advanced) ··········78
Speaker installation ·····································································78
Speaker connection ····································································80
Set up speakers ·········································································· 89
Playback (Advanced operation) ·················································91
HDMI control function ································································91
Sleep timer function ···································································92
Quick select function ·································································· 93
REC OUT mode ··········································································94
Web control function ··································································95
Various memory functions ··························································96
Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room) ········································· 97
Audio output ···············································································97
Playback ······················································································98
Sleep timer function ···································································98
How to make detailed settings ··················································99
Menu map ··················································································99
Examples of menu screen displays ··········································101
Examples of menu and front display ········································102
Inputting characters ·································································· 103
Audio·························································································104
Video ·························································································111
Inputs ························································································116
Speakers ··················································································· 121
Network ···················································································· 126
General ·····················································································130
Informations·········································································136
Part names and functions·························································137
Front panel ················································································137
Display ······················································································138
Rear panel ·················································································139
Remote control unit ·································································· 140
Other information ·····································································142
Trademark information ······························································142
Surround ···················································································143
Relationship between video signals and monitor output ··········149
Explanation of terms ·································································151
Troubleshooting ········································································ 154
Resetting the microprocessor ··················································158
Specifications ············································································159
Getting started ··············································································1
Accessories ··················································································2
Features ························································································2
Cautions on handling ····································································3
Contents
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
DVD
2
Features
With a discrete-circuit configuration, the power
amplifier provides identical quality for all 7
channels (135 W x 7ch)
The unit is equipped with a power amplifier that reproduces
highfidelity sound in sound mode with equal quality and power for
all channels, true to the original sound.
The power amplifier circuit adopts a discrete-circuit configuration
that achieves high-quality surround sound reproduction.
Supports internet radio, music, and photograph
streaming
Supports AirPlay
®
(vpage69)
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening
to Internet radio, playing the audio files stored on your PC, and
displaying on a TV the photographs stored on your PC.
This unit also supports AirPlay that lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or iTunes.
Compatible with “Denon Remote App” for
performing basic operations of the unit with an
iPad, iPhone
z1
or Android smartphone
“Denon Remote App” is application software that allows you to
perform basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone
or Android tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the
volume, and switching the source.
z1 Download “Denon Remote App” from iTunes
®
App Store.
The unit needs to be connected to a LAN and the iPhone/iPod
touch needs to be connected to the same network by Wi-Fi
(wireless LAN).
“Setup Assistant”, providing easy-to-follow setup
instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers,
network, etc.
Easy to use, Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with an easy to see “Graphical User Interface”
that uses menu displays and levels. The use of level displays
increases operability of the this unit.
HDMI connectors enable connection to various
digital AV devices (input: 6, output: 2)
The unit is equipped with 6 HDMI input connectors for connecting
devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player,
game machine, HD digital camcorder, etc.
Supports HDMI (3D, ARC, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”,
Auto Lip Sync, 4K) and HDMI control function
(vpage7)
In addition to HDMI 3D and ARC (Audio Return Channel) functions,
this unit supports the video pass-through function, which outputs
video to TV without changing the video quality when video signals
of 4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) are input, and the GUI overlay function,
which overlays the menu screen (GUI) on the 4K video screen.
Simultaneous playback on two HDMI channels
This unit is equipped with two HDMI MONITOR outputs. You can
connect one output to a projector and the other output to a TV for
simultaneous signal outputs.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
q Getting Started ........................................................................ 1
w CD-ROM (Owner’s manual) .................................................... 2
e Safety Instructions .................................................................. 1
r Service network list ................................................................. 1
t Power cord .............................................................................. 1
y Remote control unit (RC-1167) ................................................ 1
u R03/AAA batteries ................................................................... 2
i Setup microphone (ACM1HB) ................................................. 1
o FM indoor antenna .................................................................. 1
y oi
t
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
v See overleaf
DVD
3
Cautions on handling
•Before turning the power on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
•Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is
set to the standby mode. When going on vacation or leaving home
for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the
power outlet.
•About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on
the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate
properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature
before using the unit.
•Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If that
occurs, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
•Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units
before moving the unit.
•About care
•Wipe the cabinet and control panel clean with a soft cloth.
•Follow the instructions when using a chemical cleaner.
•Benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents as well as
insecticide may cause material changes and discoloration if brought
into contact with the unit, and should therefore not be used.
Features
Digital video processor up-scales analog video
signals (SD resolution) to 4K
This unit is equipped with the 4K video upscaling function, which
allows for outputting analog or SD (standard video quality) video
to HDMI at 4K (3840 × 2160 pixels). This enables the unit and a TV
connected with a single HDMI cable and any video source to be
reproduced precisely with HD level of quality.
Direct play for iPod
®
and iPhone
®
via USB
(vpage19)
Music data from an iPod can be played back if you connect the USB
cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and also
an iPod can be controlled with the remote control unit for this unit.
Audyssey DSX
®
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX
®
processor. By
connecting front height speakers to this unit and playing back
through Audyssey DSX
®
, you can experience a more powerful
playback expression in the height audio range. By connecting front
wide speakers, you can experience a more powerful playback
expression in the wide audio range.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
DVD
Basic version
4
F Connections vpage5
F Setup vpage26
F Playback (Basic operation) vpage33
F Selecting a listening mode (Sound Mode) vpage71
Basic version
Here, we explain the connections and basic operation methods for this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
5
Important information
Make connections before using this unit.
To create a home theater that can play back higher quality video and audio by fully utilizing the
capabilities of this unit and your video devices, connect this unit to each of your video devices with
HDMI cables.
n HDMI-compatible device
If your video device does not support HDMI connections, use the following connection.
n HDMI-incompatible device
This unit can change the source that is assigned to the DIGITAL AUDIO IN and COMPONENT VIDEO
IN connectors.
You can change the source for connectors listed in Input connector setting within pages that
describe connections for devices.
For details on assigning a source to connectors, see “Changing the source assigned to connectors”
(vpage12). For the setting method, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
NOTE
•The menu screen is only displayed on TV connected to this unit via HDMI. If your TV is connected
to this unit via other video output connectors, perform menu operations while seeing the display
on this unit.
•Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed. However, when the “Setup
Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the “Setup Assistant” (C page 7) screen for making
connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)
•When running the “Setup Assistant” (C page 7), turn off the power supply of connected devices.
•When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other devices being connected.
•Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).
•Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.
Connections
n HDMI-compatible device
vpage8 vpage10 vpage10
vpage10 vpage10 vpage10
vpage10
n HDMI-incompatible device
vpage13 vpage14 vpage15
vpage16 vpage17 vpage18
vpage19 vpage20 vpage21
vpage24
n Others
vpage80 vpage25
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
6
Important information
Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, Component video and video) and three types of video output connectors
(HDMI, Component video and video).
This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to this unit into the formats used to output the video signals from
this unit to a monitor.
GFlow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH
HDMI connector
HDMI signal HDMI signal
Component video
signal
Video signal Video signal
Video connector
HDMI-compatible TV
HDMI-incompatible
TV
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector Video connector
HDMI connectorHDMI connector
Video connector
Video device
This unit
Output
Input
(IN)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Component video
signal
Component video
connectors
For example, if you connect this unit to an HDMI-compatible TV with a single HDMI cable, this unit automatically converts input signals other
than HDMI video signals to HDMI signals to output from the HDMI connector to the TV. This unit outputs only one type of video signals, so
video signals output from this unit to the TV remain unchanged even if you switch to a device that outputs another type of video signals for
playback. Therefore, you do not need to switch the video input on the TV. Furthermore, this unit converts the input analog video signals such as
video and component video signals to high resolution digital HDMI video signals for output, improving the quality of the video.
If your TV does not support HDMI connections, connect this unit to TV with analog video connectors. This unit can not convert HDMI input
signals to analog video signals, so when inputting from an HDMI device, use component video or video input connectors.
•If you do not want this unit to convert video signals automatically,
use the following setting item to disable this function.
“Video Conversion” (vpage113)
•If you want to change the resolution of video signals output to
the TV, use the following setting item to do so.
“Resolution” (vpage114)
Make Settings as Necessary
•The video conversion function supports the NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
NTSC 4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60 formats.
•Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “Video” –
“Monitor” (vpage133).
NOTE
•The menu screen is only displayed on TV connected to this unit
via HDMI. If your TV is connected to this unit via other video
output connectors, perform menu operations while seeing the
display on this unit.
•HDMI signals are digital. HDMI signals cannot be converted into
analog signals.
•When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some
other source is input, the video conversion function might not
operate.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
7
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
You can connect up to eight HDMI-compatible devices (6-inputs/2-outputs) to the unit.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI
connections. Connections with an HDMI cable offer the following benefits that can not be achieved with
other connection methods.
•High quality playback by transmitting audio and video via digital signals
HDMI connections can transmit high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-
ray disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, dts-HD, dts-HD Master Audio).
HDMI connections also convey information required for playback between devices. The information
is used for copyright protection and TV resolution recognition, the ARC function, the HDMI control
function, etc.
•Transmission of audio and video signals with a single HDMI cable
Previous connections require multiple audio and video cables, but HDMI connections require only a
single HDMI cable to transmit audio and video signals. This allows wires in a home theater system,
which tend to be complicated, to be more organized.
•Mutual control through the HDMI control function (vpage91)
This unit and the HDMI device connected via HDMI can be linked to perform operations such as
power control, volume control, and input source switching.
•Other video and audio functions, such as 3D video playback, Content Type, the ARC function,
are supported (vpage11).
•There is more than one version of HDMI standard. The supported functions and the performance vary
according to the version. This unit complies with the HDMI standard, supporting the ARC and 3D playback
functions. To enjoy these functions, the HDMI device connected to this unit also needs to use the same
version of the standard. For the version of the HDMI standard on the device connected to this unit, see
the device’s manual.
•Some TVs do not support audio input via HDMI connections. For details, see your TV’s manual.
n Before connecting this unit to TV via HDMI connections (vpage8)
n Connecting this unit to a TV via HDMI connections (vpage9)
n Connecting this unit to video devices via HDMI connections (vpage10)
n HDMI function (vpage11)
n Settings related to HDMI connections (vpage11)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
8
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
n About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function
This function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback
device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from
the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is
required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection
is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this
unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.
When the ARC function is used, connect a device with a “Standard HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High
Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” for HDMI.
Refer to the owner’s manual for your TV for details about TV connection and settings.
GConnection to a TV with the ARC functionH
IN OUT
Audio signals from the TV
Audio from the TV
This unit SpeakersTV
GConnection to a TV without the ARC functionH
IN OUT
INOUT
Audio signals from the TV
Audio signals from the TV
Optical cable
Audio from the TV
Before connecting this unit to TV via HDMI connections
There are 2 methods to connect HDMI-compatible TV to this unit.
Use the connection method that suits your TV.
Does the TV to be connected to this unit support the ARC function?
Connecting this unit to a TV via
HDMI connections (vpage9)
Connecting this unit to a TV via
HDMI connections (vpage9)
Connecting a TV (vpage13)
For audio connections, use a method other
than HDMI connections.
Yes No
+
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
9
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
Connecting this unit to a TV via HDMI connections
Cables used for connections
Audio and video cable (sold separately)
HDMI cable
(ARC)
IN
HDMI
(ARC)
IN
HDMI
TV 1 TV 2
•Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case,
switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
•When this unit and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with
HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor. Make audio connections
(vpage13 “Connecting a TV”).
NOTE
•The audio signal from the HDMI output connector (sampling frequency, number of channels, etc.) may be
limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the connected device regarding permissible inputs.
•When connecting a TV that does not support the ARC function, an audio cable connection is
required in addition to the HDMI cable. In this case, refer to “Connecting a TV” (vpage13) for
the connection method.
For the ARC function, see “About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function” (vpage8).
Connecting to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector
The DVI-D (Digital Visual Interface) method is also used for video transmission via digital signals. This is
developed mainly for computers, and some AV devices such as projectors are equipped with this interface.
To output HDMI video signals to a DVI-D video input compatible device, use an HDMI/DVI conversion
cable, which converts HDMI video signals to DVI signals.
The DVI-D connector can transmit high quality digital signals, but the copy guard and other issues may
hinder normal operations for some device combinations.
NOTE
•No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector. Make audio
connections as described in “Connecting a TV” (vpage13).
•Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP.
•Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output.
Settings required when using a TV that supports the ARC function
When using a TV that supports the ARC function, make the following settings.
•Set “HDMI Control” (vpage113) to “On”.
•Set “Control Monitor” (vpage113) to match the number of the HDMI MONITOR connector connected
to the TV that supports the ARC function.
NOTE
If the TV that supports the ARC function is connected to both HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2
connectors, you cannot use ARC function at the same time.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
10
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
OUT
HDMI
GFront panelH
Digital
camcorder
•When this unit is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, connect this unit and TV also with an
HDMI cable.
•When connecting a device that supports Deep Color or 4K, please use a “High Speed HDMI cable” or
“High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
•Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case,
switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
Connecting this unit to video devices via HDMI connections
Cables used for connections
Audio and video cable (sold separately)
HDMI cable
•This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable.
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
Blu-ray
Disc
player
DVD
player
Media
player
Set-top
box
Game
console
GRear panelH
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
11
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device
n Deep Color (vpage151)
When a device supporting Deep Color is connected, use a cable compatible with “High Speed HDMI
cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
n Auto Lip Sync (vpage112, 151)
n “x.v.Color”, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
(vpage151, 153)
n High definition digital audio format
n ARC (Audio Return Channel) (vpage8)
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both
this unit and TV or the player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of
data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
•If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read
the owner’s manual of your television or player for more information.
Settings related to HDMI connections
Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages.
n HDMI Setup (vpage112)
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
•Auto Lip Sync •HDMI Control •Power Off Control
•HDMI Audio Out •Standby Source
•Video Output •Control Monitor
NOTE
The audio signal input from the HDMI input connector can be output as an output signal from the HDMI
output connector by setting the HDMI audio output destination to TV.
Audio signals input via the Analog/Coaxial/Optical input connectors cannot be output from the HDMI
MONITOR output connector.
HDMI function
This unit supports the following HDMI functions:
n About 3D function
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI.
To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a
pair of 3D glasses.
NOTE
•When playing back 3D video, refer to the instructions provided in the manual of your playback device
together with this manual.
•When playing back 3D video content, the menu screen or status display screen can be superimposed
over the image. However, the menu screen or status display screen cannot be superimposed over
certain 3D video content.
•If 3D video with no 3D information is input, the menu screen and status display on this unit are displayed
over the playback video.
•If 2D video is converted to 3D video on the television, the menu screen and status display on this unit
are not displayed correctly. To view the menu screen and status display on this unit correctly, turn the
television setting that converts 2D video to 3D video off.
n About 4K function
This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) video signals of HDMI.
When a device supporting 4K is connected, use a cable compatible with “High Speed HDMI cable” or
“High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.
n HDMI control function (vpage91)
This function allows you to operate external devices from the unit and operate the unit from external
devices.
NOTE
•The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings.
•You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control
function.
n About Content Type
This function was added with the HDMI standard. It automatically makes settings suitable for the video-
output type (content information).
NOTE
To enable the Content Type, set “Video Mode” to “Auto” (vpage113).
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
12
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
For high quality video and surround playback, it is recommended to
use an HDMI cable to connect this unit to TV and other video devices
(vpage7 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device”).
This section describes connections when your device does not
support HDMI connections.
Connection methods for various devices
vpage13 vpage14
vpage15 vpage16
vpage17
vpage18
vpage19 vpage20
vpage21 vpage24
Cables used for connections
Video cable (sold separately)
Component video
cable
Video cable
Audio cable (sold separately)
Coaxial digital cable
Optical cable
Audio cable
R
L
R
L
Cable (sold separately)
Ethernet cable
Changing the source assigned to
connectors
This unit can change the source that is assigned to the HDMI IN,
DIGITAL AUDIO IN and COMPONENT VIDEO IN connectors.
Let us take a digital audio connection for Blu-ray Disc players for an
example. The rear panel digital audio input connectors do not have the
input connector indication for Blu-ray disc players (Blu-ray). However,
DIGITAL AUDIO IN connectors have the “ASSIGNABLE” indication,
which means that you can change the source assigned to these
connectors. You can assign Blu-ray disc players to these connectors
to use them for Blu-ray disc players. Select “Blu-ray” when switching
functions on this unit to play back the source connected to these
connectors.
n How to change the source assigned to
connectors (vpage117)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
13
Connecting a TV
•This section describes how to connect when your TV does not support HDMI connections.
For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
•If the TV connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector that supports ARC, digital audio
signals from TV can be transmitted to this unit (vpage 8 “About ARC (Audio Return Channel)
function”). The ARC function allows you to enjoy on this unit the audio from TV programs and HDMI
devices directly connected to TV, without having to make a separate audio connection. For the ARC
function, also see your TV’s manual.
•To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital connection.
For video connections, see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”
(vpage6).
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
a DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
z
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound.
z When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
n Video connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (MONITOR) connector
This makes an analog video connection. This connection method separates video signals into 3
signals for transmission based on color components, achieving the best quality video playback
among analog video connections, with less signal degradation.
s VIDEO OUT (MONITOR) connector
This makes an analog video connection.
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “TV AUDIO”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
a a s
a
VIDEOAUDIO
IN
VIDEO
OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
IN
TV
or or
NOTE
•The menu screen is only displayed on TV connected to this unit via HDMI. If your TV is connected
to this unit via other video output connectors, perform menu operations while seeing the display
on this unit.
•If you do not connect this unit to your TV via HDMI, do not make HDMI connections for video inputs from
other video devices, either. For details see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion
function)” (vpage6).
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
14
a a a ss
R
L
R
L
VIDEOAUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OUT
Satellite tuner/Cable TV
or or or
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This section describes how to connect when your satellite tuner or cable TV does not support HDMI
connections.
For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
z
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound.
z When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s AUDIO IN (CBL/SAT) connector
This makes an analog audio connection. This type of connection converts digital audio to analog
audio, so the output audio may be degraded compared to connections a.
n Video connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN (CBL/SAT) connector
This makes an analog video connection. This connection method separates video signals into 3
signals for transmission based on color components, achieving the best quality video playback
among analog video connections, with less signal degradation.
s VIDEO IN (CBL/SAT) connector
This makes an analog video connection.
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “TV AUDIO” to “CBL/SAT”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
15
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Connecting a DVD player
This section describes how to connect when your DVD player does not support HDMI connections.
For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
z
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound.
z When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s AUDIO IN (DVD) connector
This makes an analog audio connection. This type of connection converts digital audio to analog
audio, so the output audio may be degraded compared to connections a.
n Video connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN (DVD) connector
This makes an analog video connection. This connection method separates video signals into 3
signals for transmission based on color components, achieving the best quality video playback
among analog video connections, with less signal degradation.
s VIDEO IN (DVD) connector
This makes an analog video connection.
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “TV AUDIO” to “DVD”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
a a a ss
R
L
R
L
VIDEOAUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OUT
DVD player
or or or
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
16
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player
This section describes how to connect when your Blu-ray disc player does not support HDMI connections.
For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound. However, digital bit stream audio signals for HD audios from Blu-ray disc
players (such as Dolby Digital Plus and dts-HD) can not be transmitted.
When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s AUDIO IN (Blu-ray) connector
This makes an analog audio connection. This type of connection converts digital audio to analog
audio, so the output audio may be degraded compared to connections a.
n Video connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN connector
This makes an analog video connection. This connection method separates video signals into 3
signals for transmission based on color components, achieving the best quality video playback
among analog video connections, with less signal degradation.
When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “Blu-ray”.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “TV AUDIO” to “Blu-ray”.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “Blu-ray”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
a a as
R
L
R
L
VIDEOAUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OUT
Blu-ray Disc player
or or
When you want to play back HD Audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS Express) and Multi-
channel PCM with this unit, use an HDMI connection (vpage 7 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible
device”).
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
17
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Connecting a digital camcorder
This section describes how to connect when your digital camcorder does not support HDMI connections.
For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound.
When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s AUDIO IN (AUX) connector
This makes an analog audio connection. This type of connection converts digital audio to analog
audio, so the output audio may be degraded compared to connections a.
n Video connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN connector
This makes an analog video connection. This connection method separates video signals into 3
signals for transmission based on color components, achieving the best quality video playback
among analog video connections, with less signal degradation.
When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s VIDEO IN (AUX) connector
This makes an analog video connection.
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “AUX”.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “TV AUDIO” to “AUX”.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “AUX”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
R
L
R
L
OUT
AUDIOVIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
ss
Digital camcorder
GFront panelH
aaa
VIDEO AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OUT
Digital camcorder
GRear panelH
or
You can enjoy games by connecting a game machine via the AUX input connector. In this case, select the
input source to “AUX”.
NOTE
When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion
function (vpage 6) might not operate. In this case, use the monitor output of the same connector
as the input.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
18
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Connecting a media player
•This section describes how to connect when your media player does not support HDMI connections.
For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage7).
•When recording analog audio, use the analog connection. See “REC OUT mode” (vpage 94) for
operating instructions.
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound.
When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s AUDIO IN/OUT (MEDIA PLAYER) connector
This makes an analog audio connection. This type of connection converts digital audio to analog
audio, so the output audio may be degraded compared to connections a.
n Video connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN connector
This makes an analog video connection. This connection method separates video signals into 3
signals for transmission based on color components, achieving the best quality video playback
among analog video connections, with less signal degradation.
When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s VIDEO IN/OUT (MEDIA PLAYER) connector
This makes an analog video connection.
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “MEDIA PLAYER”.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “TV AUDIO” to “MEDIA PLAYER”.
a COMPONENT VIDEO IN connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “MEDIA PLAYER”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
a a a s ss s
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO VIDEOAUDIO AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B PR
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
RL
IN
OPTICAL
OUT
OUT
VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
Media player
or or or
NOTE
To record video signals through this unit, use the video cable for connection between this unit and the
player.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
19
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the iPod/USB port
•You can enjoy music stored on an iPod or USB memory device.
•For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (vpage 35) or “Playing a USB memory device”
(vpage38).
Cables used for connections
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
USB memory
device
iPod
or
DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a
portable USB connection type HDD of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power,
use the AC adapter.
NOTE
•USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
•It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s iPod/USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
•Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference
with other devices.
•When connecting an iPhone to this unit, keep the iPhone at least 20 cm away from this unit. If the iPhone
is kept closer to this unit and a telephone call is received by the iPhone, noise may be output from this
device.
•If the iPod is connected using an iPod cable (commercially available) that is longer than 2 m, sound may
not be played correctly. In this case, use a genuine iPod cable, or a cable that is shorter than 1 m.
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Supported iPod models
•iPod classic
•iPod nano
•iPod touch
•iPhone
(as of May 2012)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
20
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
Connecting a CD player
You can enjoy CD sound.
n Audio connection
The following methods are available for connecting to this unit. Use either of the methods to make
a connection.
The numbers prefixed with connectors indicate the recommendation order. The smaller the number is,
the higher playback quality is achieved.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
z
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL connector
When a multichannel audio (digital bit stream audio) is input, this unit decodes the audio to play
back surround sound.
z When making this type of connection, you must change the settings on this unit.
(v Input connector setting )
s AUDIO IN (CD) connector
This makes an analog audio connection. This type of connection converts digital audio to analog
audio, so the output audio may be degraded compared to connections a.
When making the following connection, you must change the input connector settings.
a DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL connector
When connecting to connectors marked as 1, change “CBL/SAT” to “CD”.
For how to change, see “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input connector setting
a as
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT
OUT
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OUT
CD player
or or
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
21
Connecting an FM antenna
•Connect the FM antenna supplied with the unit to enjoy listening to radio broadcasts.
•After connecting the antenna and receiving a broadcast signal (vpage 41 “Listening to FM
broadcasts”), fix the antenna with tape in a position where the noise level becomes minimal.
NOTE
•Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
•If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For
details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
Connecting an HDMI-incompatible device
FM outdoor
antenna
Direction of broadcasting station
75 Ω coaxial
cable
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
22
Connecting an external power amplifier
•You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting a commercially available power amp to the PRE OUT
connector. Adding a power amp to each of the channels provides an even greater sound presence.
•Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
•When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.
•Use the volume control on the subwoofer to control subwoofer volume.
•If the subwoofer volume sounds low, use the volume control provided on the subwoofer to adjust the
volume.
L
L
L
L
L
L
R R R
RR R
CENTER SURROUND
BACK
RL
SURROUND
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
2
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
1
AUDIO
Power amplifier
Subwoofer
(Primary)
Subwoofer
(Secondary)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
23
Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
If this unit is installed in a location that is out of range of the signal
from the remote control unit, you can still operate the unit and the
devices connected to it by using a commercially available IR receiver.
You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 (another room).
AUX
OUT
Device equipped with a
REMOTE CONTROL IN jack
Infrared
retransmitter
Infrared
sensor
Output
Input
RS-232C connector
When you connect an external control device, you can control this
unit with the external control device (such as power supply operation,
volume adjustment, and input source switching).
External serial controller
Perform the operation below beforehand.
q Turn on the power of this unit.
w Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.
e Check that the unit is in the standby mode.
TRIGGER OUT jack
When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected
device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation
to this unit.
The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical
signal.
12 V/150 mA trigger-compatible device
NOTE
•Use the monaural mini-plug cable for connecting TRIGGER OUT
jacks. Do not use the stereo mini-plug cable.
•If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger
than 12 V/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be
used. In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
24
Connecting to a home network (LAN)
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to perform various types of playbacks and operations
as follows. Make network connections for this unit by carefully reading information on this page.
•Playback of network audio such as the Internet radio and music servers
•Playback of music from online services
•AirPlay
•Operations on this unit via the network
In addition, when an updated firmware becomes available for improving this unit, the update information is
delivered from us to this unit over the network. You can then download the latest firmware.
For more information, on the menu, select “Update” (vpage134).
Network settings are necessary. See “Network” on the menu (vpage 126) for more information on
network setting.
Internet
To WAN side
Router
To LAN port
To LAN port
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
LAN port/
Ethernet
connector
PC
NAS
(Network Attached
Storage)
Modem
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.
Required system
n Broadband internet connection
n Modem
Device that connects to the broadband circuit
and conducts communications on the Internet.
A type that is integrated with a router is also
available.
n Router
When using this unit, we recommend you use
a router equipped with the following functions:
•Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP
addresses on the LAN.
•Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we
recommend a switching hub with a speed of
100 Mbps or greater.
n Ethernet cable
(CAT-5 or greater recommended)
•Use only a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable
which is available at retailer.
•The normal shielded-type Ethernet cable
is recommended. If a flat-type cable or
unshielded-type cable is used, other devices
could be affected by noise.
•If you have an Internet provider contract for a line
on which network settings are made manually,
make the settings at “Network” (vpage126).
•With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and
Auto IP functions to make the network settings
automatically.
•When using this unit with the broadband router’s
DHCP function enabled, this unit automatically
performs the IP address setting and other
settings.
When using this unit connected to a network with
no DHCP function, make the settings for the IP
address, etc., at “Network” (vpage126).
•When setting manually, check the setting
contents with the network administrator.
NOTE
•A contract with an ISP is required to connect to
the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already
have a broadband connection to the Internet.
•The types of routers that can be used depend on
the ISP. Contact an ISP or a computer shop for
details.
•DENON assumes no responsibility whatsoever
for any communication errors or troubles
resulting from customer’s network environment
or connected devices.
•This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-
compatible router is required if you have a contract
for a type of line set by PPPoE.
•Do not connect an NETWORK connector directly
to the LAN port/ Ethernet connector on your
computer.
•To listen to audio streaming, use a router that
supports audio streaming.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
25
Connecting the power cord
After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.
To household power outlet
(AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Power cord (supplied)
NOTE
•Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
•Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
26
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and
listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made
automatically. This is called “Audyssey
®
Setup”.
To perform measurement, place the setup microphone in
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results,
we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown
in the illustration (up to eight positions).
•When performing Audyssey
®
Setup, Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT/
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
/Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
functions
become active (vpage108).
•To set up the speakers manually, use “Speakers” (vpage 121)
on the menu.
NOTE
•Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt
the room measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on
electronic devices (TVs, radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights,
etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted
by such devices.
•During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the
listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
•Do not unplug the setup microphone from the main unit until
Audyssey
®
Setup is completed.
•Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This
will cause inaccurate readings.
•During the measurement process, loud test sounds may be played,
but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in
room, these test signals will increase in volume.
•Operating
VOLUME df on the remote
control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the
main unit during the measurements will
cancel the measurements.
•Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are
connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey
®
Setup.
Setup
Here, we explain “Audyssey
®
Setup”, which allows you to
automatically make the optimal settings for your speakers, and
“Network”, which allows you to connect this unit to a home network
(LAN).
This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files stored
on a computer and music content such as that from Internet radio.
n Speaker connection (vpage80)
n Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup) (vpage26)
n Making the network settings (Network)
(vpage32)
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage33)
Selecting a listening mode (Sound Mode)
(vpage71)
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage91)
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
About setup microphone placement
•Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone
successively at multiple positions throughout the entire listening
area, as shown in GExample qH. For best results, we recommend
you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up
to eight positions).
•Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment
results in more effective correction.
FL SW C FR
SRSL
*
M
FL SW C FR
SRSL
*
M
(
: Measuring positions)
GExample qH GExample wH
(
: Measuring positions)
FL Front speaker (L) SW Subwoofer
FR Front speaker (R) SL Surround speaker (L)
C Center speaker SR Surround speaker (R)
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey
®
Setup, place the setup
microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT uses
the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance,
level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
27
2
Set up the subwoofer
If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
For details, see your subwoofer’s manual.
n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.
n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
•Volume : “12 o’clock position”
•Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest Frequency”
•Low pass filter : “Off”
•Standby mode : “Off”
NOTE
When using 2 subwoofers at the same time, before starting
Audyssey
®
Setup. adjust the volume of the subwoofers by using
“Subwoofer Level” (vpage107) from the menu. You cannot set
the volume for individual subwoofers.
3
Set up the remote control unit
n Set up the zone mode
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN
ZONE.
MAIN lights.
Press MAIN
1
Prepare the included setup microphone
Mount the setup microphone on a tripod or stand
and place it in the main listening position.
When placing the setup microphone, adjust the height of the
sound receptor to the level of the listener’s ear.
Sound receptor
Setup
microphone
If you do not have a tripod or stand, set up the microphone on, for
example, a seat without a back.
NOTE
•Do not hold the setup microphone in your hand during
measurements.
•Avoid placing the setup microphone close to a seat back or wall as
sound reflections may give inaccurate results.
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
4
Connect the setup microphone to the SETUP MIC
jack of this unit.
Audyssey Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
•Here, we explain setup using the example of 7.1-channel speaker
playback using surround back speakers.
For setup of surround back speaker systems other than
7.1-channels, follows steps 3 to 6 in “Set up “Amp Assign””
(vpage89).
If unused channels are set with “Channel Select”, measuring time
can be shortened. For setting, perform steps 7 to 12 of “Set up
“Channel Select”” (vpage90).
Preparation
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
28
Preparation (Continued)
Detection & Measurement (Main)
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
5
Select “Start” and then press
ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Back Next
Connect the calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC input
on the front the AV receiver.
6
Select “Next” and then press ENTER.
The subwoofer volume setting screen is displayed.
Audyssey Setup
Back Next
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
If your subwoofer has a volume control on it, please set it
at 50%...
NOTE
If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
Go to “Error messages” (vpage 31). Check any related items,
and perform the necessary procedures.
If the problem is resolved, return and restart “Audyssey
®
Setup”.
Going back to the previous screen
Select “Back” and then press ENTER.
When measuring has stopped
q Select “Back” and then press ENTER.
w Press o to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
Setting up the speakers again
Repeat the operation from step 4.
•This step automatically checks the speaker configuration and speaker
size, and calculates the channel level, distance, and crossover
frequency.
It also corrects distortion in the listening area.
7
Select “Begin Test” and then press ENTER.
When measuring begins, a test tone is output from each
speaker.
•Measurement requires several minutes.
8
The detected speakers are displayed.
•The illustration below shows an example of when the front
speakers, center speaker, subwoofer and surround speakers have
been detected.
Speaker Detection
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
Surround Back
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:2spkrs
Audyssey Setup
Repeat Last Test Next
NOTE
If a connected speaker is not displayed, the speaker may not be
connected correctly. Check the speaker connection.
9
Select “Next” and then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
29
Calculation
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
11
Repeat step 10, measuring positions 3 to 8.
When measurement of position 8 is completed, a
“Measurements finished.” message is displayed.
Repeat Last Test
Audyssey Setup
Calculation
Measurements finished.
12
Select “Calculation” and then press ENTER.
Measuring results are analyzed, and the frequency response of
each speaker in the listening room is determined.
Audyssey Setup
Calibration completed! Now calculating...Please wait.
50%
•Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The more speakers
and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes
to perform the analysis.
Measurement (2nd – 8th)
•In this step, you will perform measurements at multiple positions
(two to eight positions) other than the main listening position.
•Just one position can be measured but measuring multiple positions
increases the accuracy of the correction of acoustic distortion within
the listening area.
10
Move the setup microphone to position 2, select
“Continue”, and then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements
can be made in up to eight positions.
Audyssey Setup
Calculation
Repeat Last Test
Continue
Place the microphone at ear level at the 3rd listening position,
then select "Continue"...
Audyssey Setup
Calculation
Continue
Place the microphone at ear level at the 2nd listening position,
then select "Continue"...
•To skip measuring the third and subsequent listening position, use
ui to select “Calculation” and press ENTER to proceed to step
13.
•To measure the second position again, use ui to select “Repeat
Last Test” and press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
30
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
14
Select “Store” and then press ENTER.
Save the measurement results.
Audyssey Setup
Now storing...Please wait.
50%
Audyssey Setup
Distances
Speaker Config.
Levels
Crossovers
Store
Check processing results. To proceed, press “Store”.
•Saving the results requires about 10 seconds.
•During saving of measurements results, “Now storing...Please
wait.” is displayed. When saving is completed, “Storing complete.
Audyssey
®
Setup is now finished. Please unplug microphone.” is
displayed.
NOTE
During saving of measurement results, be sure not to turn off the
power.
15
Unplug the setup microphone from the unit’s SETUP
MIC jack.
16
Set Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
.
Audyssey Setup
Yes
No
You can set Dynamic Volume function, which automatically
adjusts volume level for all content.
Do you want to enable?
•This feature adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while
constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.
n When turning Dynamic Volume on
•Press u to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.
The unit automatically enters “Medium” (vpage109) mode.
n When turning Dynamic Volume off
•Press i to select “No”, and then press ENTER.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey
®
Setup, do not change the speaker
connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform
Audyssey
®
Setup again.
Store FinishCheck
13
Use ui to select the item you
want to check, and then press
ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Distances
Speaker Config.
Levels
Crossovers
Store
Check processing results. To proceed, press “Store”.
•Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than
the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
•If you want to check another item, press BACK.
NOTE
•If the result differs from the actual connection status, or if “Caution!”
is displayed, see “Error messages” (vpage 31). Then carry out
Audyssey
®
Setup again.
• If you change speaker positions or orientation, perform Audyssey
®
Setup again to find the optimal equalizer settings.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
31
Error messages
NOTE
•An error message is displayed if Audyssey
®
Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the
necessary measures. Then perform Audyssey
®
Setup again.
•If the result still differs from the actual connection status after remeasurement or the error message still appears, it is possible that the speakers are not connected properly. Turn this unit off, check the speaker
connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning.
•Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
Audyssey Setup
Retry
Caution! : Please check the cable connection and retry.
Microphone or Speaker is none
•The connected setup microphone is broken, or a device other than the
supplied setup microphone is connected.
•Not all speakers could be detected.
•Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
•Check the speaker connections.
Audyssey Setup
Retry
Caution!
Ambient noise is too high or level is too low
•There is too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be
made.
•Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be
made.
•Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
•Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
•Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are
facing.
•Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Audyssey Setup
Retry
Caution! : Please check the cable connection and retry.
Front R :None
•The displayed speaker could not be detected.
(The screen on the left indicates that the front right speaker cannot be
detected.)
•Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Skip Error
Audyssey Setup
Retry Phase Info.
Caution! : Please check the cable connection and retry.
Front R :Phase
•The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.
(The screen on the left indicates that the polarity phases of the front right
speakers are reversed.)
•Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
•For some speakers, this error message may be
displayed even if the speaker is properly connected.
If you are sure the connection is correct, use o p
to select “Skip Error”, then press ENTER.
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
32
Parameter Check
This function enables you to check the measurement results and equalizer characteristics after Audyssey
®
Setup.
1
Use ui to select “Parameter Check” and then press ENTER.
Audyssey Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Parameter Check
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
Audyssey Setup/Parameter Check
Distances
Levels
Crossovers
Speaker Config.
Equalizers
Restore...
Check Audyssey Setup Measurement results.
2
Use ui to select the item you want to check, then press ENTER.
Measurement results for each speaker are displayed.
Speaker Config.
Check the speaker configuration.
Distances
Check the speaker distance.
Levels
Check the speaker channel level.
Crossovers
Check the speaker crossover frequency.
Equalizers
Check the equalizer.
•If “Equalizers” is selected, press
ui to select equalizing curve (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”) to
be checked.
Use ui to switch the display between the different speakers.
3
Press o or BACK.
The confirmation screen reappears. Repeat step 2.
Retrieving Audyssey
®
Setup settings
If you set “Restore...” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey
®
Setup measurement result (value calculated
at the start by MultEQ
®
XT) even when you have changed each setting manually.
Set up speakers (Audyssey
®
Setup)
Making the network settings
(Network)
This unit can be connected to a home network (LAN) to listen to Internet radio or play back music files and
still image (JPEG) files stored on a computer.
1
Connect the Ethernet cable (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).
2
Turn on this unit (vpage 33).
This unit performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in “Settings”
(vpage128).
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
33
Playback (Basic operation)
Setup (vpage26)
n Turning the power on (vpage33)
n Selecting the input source (vpage33)
n Adjusting the master volume (vpage34)
n Turning off the sound temporarily (vpage34)
n Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player
(vpage34)
n Playing Super Audio CD (vpage34)
n Playing a CD player (vpage35)
n Playing an iPod (vpage35)
n Playing a USB memory device (vpage38)
n Listening to FM broadcasts (vpage41)
n Listening to internet radio (vpage52)
n Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
(vpage55)
n Using online services (vpage59)
n Convenient functions (vpage65)
n AirPlay function (vpage69)
Selecting a listening mode (Sound Mode)
(vpage71)
Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage91)
Important information
Before starting playback, make the connections between the different
devices and the settings on the unit.
NOTE
Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected devices
when playing them.
Turning the power on
Press POWER X to turn on power to
the unit.
The power indicator flashes green and the
power turns on.
You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main
unit.
n When power is switched to standby
Press POWER X.
GPower indicator status in standby modeH
•Normal standby : Off
•When “HDMI Control” (vpage113) is set to “On” : Red
•When “IP Control” (vpage127) is set to “Always On” : Red
Selecting the input source
Press the input source select button
(CBL/SAT, DVD, Blu-ray, GAME,
AUX, MEDIA PLAYER, iPod/USB,
CD, FM, NETWORK, TV AUDIO or
INTERNET RADIO) to be played back.
The desired input source can be selected
directly.
You can also use the following operation to select an input
source.
n Select the input source using the main unit
Turn SOURCE SELECT.
•Turning SOURCE SELECT switches the input source, as shown
below.
GAME AUX MEDIA PLAYER
iPod/USBFMNETWORK CDTV AUDIO
Blu-rayDVDCBL/SAT
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
34
Adjusting the master volume
Use VOLUME df to adjust the
volume.
•The volume display method varies
depending on the “Scale” setting
(vpage108).
n When the “Scale” setting
(vpage108) is “0 – 98”
GAdjustable rangeH
0.0
0.5 – 98.0
n When the “Scale” setting (vpage108) is “–79.5dB –
18.0dB”
GAdjustable rangeH
– – –.–
–79.5dB – 18.0dB
•The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel
level setting.
You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME
on the main unit.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE :.
•“MUTE” indicator on the display flashes.
•: appears on a TV screen.
•The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage108).
•To cancel, press MUTE : again. Muting can also be canceled by
adjusting the master volume.
Important information
Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD
player
The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/
DVD player.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the TV,
subwoofer and player.
w Change the TV input to the input of
this unit.
e Load the disc in the player.
2
Press POWER X to turn on power
to the unit.
3
Press Blu-ray or DVD to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4
Play the Blu-ray Disc player or DVD player.
•Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting,
subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.
Playing Super Audio CD
The following describes the procedure for playing Super Audio CD.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the subwoofer
and player.
w Load the disc in the player.
2
Press POWER X to turn on power
to the unit.
3
Perform the settings of the “Input Assign” menu
(vpage 117).
Assign HDMI connectors for the input source(example: DVD).
4
Press the input source select button (example: DVD)
to switch an input source assigned in step 3.
5
Set the audio input mode to “Auto” using the “Input
Mode” menu (vpage 119).
•The default setting of “Input Mode” is “Auto”.
6
Play the component connected to this unit.
When playing back Super Audio CD, DSD signals are converted into
PCM signals which are then converted into analog signals.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
35
Playing a CD player
The following describes the procedure for playing CD player.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Turn on the power of the subwoofer
and player.
w Load the disc in the player.
2
Press POWER X to turn on power
to the unit.
3
Press CD to switch the input
source to “CD”.
4
Play the CD player.
Playing an iPod
You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod
with the unit’s iPod/USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this
unit, see “Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the iPod/USB
port” (vpage19).
Listening to music on an iPod
The iPod display modes include “Remote Mode” and “Browse
Mode”.
By default, “Remote Mode”, where you directly operate iPod itself
while seeing the iPod screen, is set.
To change to “Browse Mode”, where you perform operations while
having the iPod information displayed on the TV screen, see “Setting
Browse mode (Operation Mode)” (vpage36).
1
Using the USB cable provided
with the iPod, connect the
iPod to the iPod/USB port
(vpage 19).
2
Press POWER X to turn on
power to the unit.
3
Press iPod/USB to switch the
input source to “iPod/USB”.
“Remote iPod” is displayed on the
display of this unit.
•Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.
4
Operate iPod itself directly while
seeing the iPod screen to play
back music.
n Streaming music stored in iPhone, iPod touch,
or iPad directly to the unit (vpage69)
n Playing iTunes music with this unit
(vpage69)
Operations available through the OPTION button
Press the OPTION button to display a menu of functions that can be
used on the TV screen. Select the function you want to use from this
menu. You can easily find and use the desired function.
n Setting Browse mode (Operation Mode)
(vpage36)
n Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
(vpage37)
n Performing random playback (Random)
(vpage37)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
36
Playing an iPod
n Setting Browse mode (Operation Mode)
In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on iPod are
displayed on the TV screen.
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on iPod
in “Browse Mode”.
1
Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Select “Operation Mode”, then press ENTER.
The “Operation Mode” screen is displayed.
Operation Mode
Option
4
Use o p to select “Browse
Mode”, then press ENTER.
The iPod screen is displayed.
Operation Mode
Browse Mode
•English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed.
Incompatible characters are displayed as “.” (period).
•Operations available for “Browse Mode” and “Remote Mode” are
listed below.
Display mode
Remote Mode Browse Mode
Playable
files
Music file
P P
Video file
z
Active
buttons
Remote
control unit
(This unit)
P P
iPod
P
z Only the sound is played.
5
Use ui to select the item, then press ENTER or p to
select the le to be played.
6
Press ENTER, p or 1/3.
Playback starts.
n Adjusting the sound quality (Restorer)
Make this setting at “Restorer” (vpage107) in the menu.
You can use the “Restorer” function to restore to a state close
to the audio before compression while correcting the bass feel to
enjoy a richer playback experience. The default setting is “Mode
3 (Low)”.
n Changing the screen display duration
Make this setting at “Audio Display” (vpage115) in the menu.
The default setting is “30s”.
Press uio p while the display is off to return to the original
screen.
n Switching the screen display
In Browse mode, press STATUS on the main unit during playback.
The display switches between track title, artist name, and album
title etc. each time the button is pressed.
NOTE
•Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
•Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in
conjunction with the iPod.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
37
Playing an iPod
n Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
1
Press OPTION while in Browse mode.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
iPod
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
Repeat
Option
Random
Operation Mode
3
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
OPTION
iPod
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
Repeat
All
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Off One
All
Off
Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One
A file being played is played repeatedly.
All
All files in the folder currently being played are played
repeatedly.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
n Performing random playback (Random)
1
Press OPTION while in Browse mode.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
iPod
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
Repeat
Option
Random
Operation Mode
3
Use o p to select random playback mode.
OPTION
iPod
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
Random
Off
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Off On
Off
Disable random playback.
On
Enable random playback.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
The random playback randomly selects a track to play back from all
tracks every time a track ends. Therefore, the same track may be
played back consecutively.
n iPod operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
CH/PAGE df
Page search
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
OPTION
Browse / Remote mode switching /
Repeat playback /
Random playback
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui) /
Manual search (Press and hold, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
8 9
Auto search (cue)
1/3
Playback / Pause
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
38
Playing a USB memory device
Playing back music or still picture (JPEG) files recorded on a USB memory device.
Important information
•Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol)
standards can be played on this unit.
•This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or “FAT32” format.
•This unit is compatible with MP3 files conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3” standards.
•File types that this unit can play back and specifications are shown below.
GSupported file typesH
Supported file types USB memory devices
z1
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
P
z2
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
P
WAV
P
MPEG-4 AAC
P
z3
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
P
JPEG
P
z1 USB memory device
•This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
•This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
•This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
•If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 ×
349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back properly.
•WAV format Quantization bit length: 16 bits.
•FLAC format Quantization bit length: 16 or 24 bits.
z2 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible with MTP.
z3 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in
WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on
the computer’s settings.
NOTE
File types that this unit does not support are not displayed.
GCompatible formatsH
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz .flac
n Maximum Number of Playable Files and Folder
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.
Media
Item
USB memory devices
Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB
Number of folder directory levels
z1
8 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of files
z2
5000
z1 The limited number includes the root folder.
z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device capacity and the file
size.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
39
Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
1
Connect the USB memory device to the iPod/USB
port (vpage 19).
2
Press iPod/USB to switch the
input source to “iPod/USB”.
D&M1
D&M2
D&M3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
OPTION
USB [1/9]
Option
3
Use ui to select the search item
or folder, then press ENTER or p.
4
Use ui to select the le, then
press ENTER, p or 1/3.
Playback starts.
Playing a USB memory device
n Adjusting the sound quality (Restorer)
Make this setting at “Restorer” (vpage107) in the menu.
You can use the “Restorer” function to restore to a state close
to the audio before compression while correcting the bass feel to
enjoy a richer playback experience. The default setting is “Mode
3 (Low)”.
n Going back to the previous screen
Press o or BACK.
n Changing the screen display duration
Make this setting at “Audio Display” (vpage115) in the menu.
The default setting is “30s”.
Press uio p while the display is off to return to the original
screen.
•When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can
be displayed while playing the file.
•If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the
first partition is played back.
NOTE
•Note that DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any
problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using
this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.
•USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
•DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will
operate or be supplied power. When using a USB portable hard disk
that can draw power from an AC adapter, we recommend using the
AC adapter.
•It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the iPod/USB
port of this unit using a USB cable.
Operations available through the OPTION button
Press the OPTION button to display a menu of functions that can be
used on the TV screen. Select the function you want to use from this
menu. You can easily find and use the desired function.
n Searching content with keywords
(Text Search) (vpage65)
n Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
(vpage66)
n Performing random playback (Random)
(vpage66)
n Playing back music and a favorite picture at the
same time (Picture View) (vpage68)
n Playing back still images in sequential order
(Slideshow) (vpage68)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
40
Playing a USB memory device
n USB memory device operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
CH/PAGE df
Page search
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
OPTION
Text Search /
Repeat playback /
Random playback /
Picture View /
Slideshow
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
8 9
Auto search (cue)
1/3
Playback / Pause
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
41
Listening to FM broadcasts
For antenna connections, see “Connecting an FM antenna”
(vpage21).
How to tune in
The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode
that automatically searches available broadcast stations and “Manual”
mode that lets you tune in using buttons to change the frequency. The
default setting is “Auto”. You can also use “Direct Tune” to tune in by
entering the frequency directly.
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is
not good. If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct
Tune” to tune in.
Listening to FM broadcasts
1
Press FM to switch the input
source to “FM”.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
GDisplay of this unitH
01 FM 87.50MHz
2
Press TUNE + or TUNE – to select the station you
want to hear.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station.
When it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically
and tunes in.
n Adding to the FAVORITE STATION button
(vpage67)
Operations available through the OPTION button
Press the OPTION button to display a menu of functions that can be
used on the TV screen. Select the function you want to use from this
menu. You can easily find and use the desired function.
n Tuning in by entering the radio frequency
(Direct Tune) (vpage43)
n RDS search (vpage48)
n PTY search (vpage49)
n TP search (vpage50)
n Radio Text (vpage51)
n Tuning in to radio stations and presetting them
automatically (Auto Preset Memory) (vpage44)
n Changing the tuning mode (Tune Mode)
(vpage42)
n Presetting the current broadcast station
(Preset Memory) (vpage45)
n Specify a name for the preset broadcast station
(Preset Name) (vpage46)
n Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip) (vpage47)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
42
Listening to FM broadcasts
n Changing the tuning mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM broadcasts. If you
cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, then change the
mode to “Manual” and tune in manually.
1
Press FM to switch the input
source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Tune Mode”,
then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
Tune Mode
4
Use o p to select tuning mode, then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Tune Mode
Auto
GDisplay of this unitH
Mode : Auto
Auto
Automatically tune to the station.
Manual
Manually tune to the station.
5
Press TUNE + or TUNE – to select the station you
want to hear.
The frequency changes in steps each time the button is
pressed.
When tuning in stations manually, press and hold TUNE + or TUNEto
change frequencies continuously.
n Changing the screen display duration
Make this setting at “Audio Display” (vpage115) in the menu.
The default setting is “30s”.
Press uio p while the display is off to return to the original
screen.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
43
Listening to FM broadcasts
n Tuning in by entering the radio frequency
(Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Direct Tune”,
then press ENTER.
The direct tuner screen is displayed and
“–” in the display flashes.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
Direct Tune
4
Use ui to select a number and press p.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
GTV ScreenH
STEREO
AUTO
FM
DIRECT TUNE
Now Playing
Input Enter
FM ---.--MHz
GDisplay of this unitH
Direct Tune
FM ---.--MHz
•If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
5
Repeat step 4 and enter the frequency of the radio
station you want to hear.
6
When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
44
Listening to FM broadcasts
Presetting broadcast stations
n Tuning in to radio stations and presetting them
automatically (Auto Preset Memory)
Up to 56 stations can be preset.
If “Auto Preset Memory” is performed after performing “Preset
Memory”, the “Preset Memory” settings will be overwritten.
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
Auto Preset
4
Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and
preset them.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Auto Preset Memory
Start
GDisplay of this unitH
AutoPreset:Start
•When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about
5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
45
n Presetting the current broadcast station
(Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune
them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
The list of already preset channels is displayed.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
Preset Memory
Listening to FM broadcasts
4
Use ui to select the channel you want to preset,
then press ENTER.
The current broadcast station that is preset.
•To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset stored at CH 1
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
1 FM 87.50MHz
Preset Memory
2 FM 89.10MHz
3 FM 98.10MHz
4 FM108.00MHz
5 FM 90.10MHz
6 FM 90.10MHz
7 FM 90.10MHz
8 FM 90.10MHz
GDisplay of this unitH
01 FM 87.50MHz
Stored
The channel numbers of broadcast stations set as “Preset Skip”
(vpage47) are grayed out, but these stations can be preset.
When grayed out channel numbers are preset, these are highlighted
and the “Preset Skip” setting changes to “On”.
Channel Default Settings
1 – 8
87.50 / 89.10 / 98.10 / 108.00 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
9 – 16
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
17 – 24
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
25 – 32
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
33 – 40
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
41 – 48
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
49 – 56
90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 / 90.10 /
90.10 MHz
Listening to preset stations
Use CH/PAGE df to select the desired
preset channel.
GDisplay of this unitH
01 FM 87.50MHz
You can also select preset broadcast stations by pressing TUNER
PRESET CH +
or TUNER PRESET CH – on the main unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
46
Listening to FM broadcasts
n Specify a name for the preset broadcast station
(Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.
Up to eight characters can be input.
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Preset Name”,
then press ENTER.
The Preset Name screen is displayed.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Name
Option
Preset Skip
GDisplay of this unitH
Preset Name
4
Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station
you want to name, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the preset name is displayed.
•Each time
o p is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
1 – 8 9 – 16 25 – 3217 – 24
41 – 4849 – 56 33 – 40
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Name
1 FM 87.50MHz
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz
3 FM 98.10MHz
4 FM 108.00MHz
5 FM 90.10MHz
6 FM 90.10MHz
7 FM 90.10MHz
8 FM 90.10MHz
GDisplay of this unitH
Group : 1- 8
5
Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
name, then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Name
1 FM 87.50MHz
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz
3 FM 98.10MHz
4 FM 108.00MHz
5 FM 90.10MHz
6 FM 90.10MHz
7 FM 90.10MHz
8 FM 90.10MHz
GDisplay of this unitH
1 FM 87.50MHz
6
Use o p to select a name label, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the preset name is displayed.
•If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the
frequency.
7
Enter the characters, then press
O K
.
•For character input, see page103.
8
Press BACK twice.
The display returns to the playback screen.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
47
n Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip)
You can set in advance, the stations you do not want to be
displayed when tuning in, by groups or by stations.
The preset skip setting is useful when tuning in, because only your
favorite stations are displayed.
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.
The Preset Skip screen is displayed.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH01 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Name
Option
Preset Skip
GDisplay of this unitH
Preset Skip
Listening to FM broadcasts
4-1
GTo set the stations you want to skip by groupsH
q Use o p to select the group of broadcast
stations you want to skip.
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as
shown below.
1 – 8 9 – 16 25 – 3217 – 24
41 – 4849 – 56 33 – 40
w Press u to select “Set zz to Skip”, then
press ENTER.
All broadcast stations in the group “zz” you selected
are not displayed.
(z are the selected group numbers)
e Press BACK.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Skip
1 FM 87.50MHz On
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz On
3 FM 98.10MHz On
4 FM 108.00MHz On
5 FM 90.10MHz On
6 FM 90.10MHz On
7 FM 90.10MHz On
8 FM 90.10MHz On
Set 1-8 to Skip
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Skip
1 FM 87.50MHz On
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz On
3 FM 98.10MHz On
4 FM 108.00MHz On
5 FM 90.10MHz On
6 FM 90.10MHz On
7 FM 90.10MHz On
8 FM 90.10MHz On
Set 1-8 to Skip
GDisplay of this unitH
Set 1- 8to Skip
4-2
GTo set the stations you want to skip by stationsH
q Use o p to select the group of broadcast
stations you want to skip.
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as
shown below.
1 – 8 9 – 16 25 – 3217 – 24
41 – 4849 – 56 33 – 40
w Use ui to select the broadcast station you
want to skip.
e Use o p to select “Skip”.
The station you selected is not displayed.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Skip
1 FM 87.50MHz On
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz On
3 FM 98.10MHz On
4 FM 108.00MHz On
5 FM 90.10MHz On
6 FM 90.10MHz On
7 FM 90.10MHz On
8 FM 90.10MHz On
Set 1-8 to Skip
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Skip
1 FM 87.50MHz Skip
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz On
3 FM 98.10MHz On
4 FM 108.00MHz On
5 FM 90.10MHz On
6 FM 90.10MHz On
7 FM 90.10MHz On
8 FM 90.10MHz On
Set 1-8 to Skip
GDisplay of this unitH
1 87.50M:•Skp–
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
48
Listening to FM broadcasts
Cancelling preset skip
1
While the Preset Skip screen is displayed, use o p
to select a group containing a broadcast station to
cancel the skip for.
2
Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the
skip for.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Preset Skip
1 FM 87.50MHz On
Preset Group 1-8
2 FM 89.10MHz On
3 FM 98.10MHz On
4 FM 108.00MHz On
5 FM 90.10MHz On
6 FM 90.10MHz On
7 FM 90.10MHz On
8 FM 90.10MHz On
Set 1-8 to Skip
GDisplay of this unitH
1 87.50M:•On –
3
Use o p to select “On”.
The skip is cancelled.
NOTE
You cannot cancel the skip for each group.
n RDS search
RDS (works only on the FM band) is a broadcasting service which
allows a station to send additional information along with the
regular radio program signal.
Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide
the RDS service.
NOTE
Note that the RDS function only works when receiving RDS compatible
stations.
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “RDS Search”, then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
RDS Search
4
Press ENTER.
The search for RDS stations begins automatically.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
RDS Search
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
- PS NAME -
Search
GDisplay of this unitH
RDS SEARCH
•If no RDS stations are found with the above operation, all the
reception bands are searched.
•When a broadcast station is found, that station’s name appears on
the display.
•If no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been
searched, “NO RDS” is displayed.
If you press o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is
shown on the display, you can search for a different station.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
49
n PTY search
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated
program type (PTY).
PTY identifies the type of RDS program.
The program types and their displays are as follows:
NEWS News WEATHER Weather
AFFAIRS Current Affairs FINANCE Finance
INFO Information
CHILDREN
Children’s
program
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education SOCIAL Social Affairs
DRAMA Drama RELIGION Religion
CULTURE Culture PHONE IN Phone In
SCIENCE Science TRAVEL Travel
VARIED Varied LEISURE Leisure
POP M Pop Music JAZZ Jazz Music
ROCK M Rock Music COUNTRY Country Music
EASY M
Easy Listening
Music
NATION M National Music
OLDIES Oldies Music
LIGHT M Light Classical FOLK M Folk Music
CLASSICS Serious Classical DOCUMENT Documentary
OTHER M Other Music
Listening to FM broadcasts
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “PTY Search” , then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
PTY Search
4
Watching the display, press ui to call out the
desired program type.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
NEWS
PTY Search
AFFAIRS
INFO
SPORT
EDUCATE
DRAMA
CH1 FM 87.50MHz - PS NAME -
GDisplay of this unitH
PTY
5
Press ENTER.
PTY search begins automatically.
•If there is no station broadcasting the designated program type with
the above operation, all the reception bands are searched.
•The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops.
•If no station broadcasting the designated program type is found
when all the frequencies have been searched, “NO PROGRAMME”
is displayed.
If you press o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is
shown on the display, you can search for a different station.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
50
n TP search
TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.
This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your
area before leaving home.
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic programs
(TP stations).
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “TP Search” , then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
TP Search
Listening to FM broadcasts
4
Press ENTER.
TP search begins automatically.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
TP Search
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
- PS NAME -
Search
GDisplay of this unitH
TP SEARCH
•If no TP station is found with the above operation, all the reception
bands are searched.
•The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops.
•If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been
searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed.
If you press o p within 5 seconds after the broadcast station name is
shown on the display, you can search for a different station.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
51
n Radio Text
RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the
display.
“Radio Text” appears on the display when radio text data is
received.
1
Press FM to switch the input source to “FM”.
2
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3
Use ui to select “Radio Text” , then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Direct Tune
Option
RDS Search
PTY Search
TP Search
Radio Text
Preset Memory
Tune Mode
Auto Preset Memory
GDisplay of this unitH
Radio Text
4
Use o p to select “On” , then press ENTER.
GTV ScreenH
TUNE+/-
STEREO
AUTO
CH / OPTION
FM
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
Radio Text
CH 1 FM 87.50MHz
- PS NAME -
ON
GDisplay of this unitH
RT :Off
•While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast
from the station is displayed.
•If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.
n FM operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
FAVORITE
STATION 1 – 3
Add/call up favorites
CH/PAGE df
Preset channel selection
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
OPTION
Switch tuning modes /
Direct frequency tuning /
RDS Search / PTY Search /
TP Search / Radio Text /
Preset Memory /
Auto Preset Memory /
Preset Name /
Preset Skip
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
TUNE +, – Tuning (up/down)
Listening to FM broadcasts
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
52
Listening to internet radio
Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet radio stations from around the world can be received.
Important information
The broad cast station types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
GPlayable broadcast station typesH
Supported file types Internet radio
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
P
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
P
GPlayable broadcast station specificationsH
Sampling
frequency
Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
Listening to internet radio
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Settings” (vpage128).
2
Press NETWORK.
•You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source
“Internet Radio” directly.
3
Use uio p to select “Internet
Radio”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Network
4
Use ui to select the item you want to play, then
press ENTER or p.
Internet Radio [1/7]
zzzzz
Search Stations
Search Podcasts
Recommended Stations
radiodenon.com
Recently Played
Search by Keyword
zzzzz
(Country name)
Displays typical Internet radio stations your country.
Search
Stations
Displays all Internet radio stations that this unit can
tune in to.
Search
Podcasts
Displays Internet radio stations in the podcasts that
this unit can tune in to.
Recommended
Stations
Displays recommended Internet radio stations.
radiodenon.
com
Displays Internet radio stations added to favorites in
vTuner. For instructions on how to add to favorites
in vTuner, see “Using vTuner to add Internet radio
stations to favorites” (vpage54).
Recently
Played
Displays recently played Internet radio stations. Up to
20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
Search by
Keyword
Displays Internet radio stations searched by keyword.
For character input, see page103.
5
Repeat step 4 until the station list is displayed.
The station list is displayed.
6
Use ui to select the station, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Network contents
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
53
Listening to internet radio
n Adjusting the sound quality (Restorer)
Make this setting at “Restorer” (vpage107) in the menu.
You can use the “Restorer” function to restore to a state close
to the audio before compression while correcting the bass feel to
enjoy a richer playback experience. The default setting is “Mode
3 (Low)”.
n Switching the screen display
Press STATUS on the main unit.
The display switches between track title and radio station name
etc. each time the button is pressed.
n Going back to the previous screen
Press o or BACK.
n Changing the screen display duration
Make this setting at “Audio Display” (vpage115) in the menu.
The default setting is “30s”.
Press uio p while the display is off to return to the original
screen.
•There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the
quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the
tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music
or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower
bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound
to be interrupted.
•“Radio station server full” or “Connection down” is displayed if the
station is busy or not broadcasting.
•On this unit, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any
characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
NOTE
The radio station database service may be suspended without notice.
Operations available through the OPTION button
Press the OPTION button to display a menu of functions that can be
used on the TV screen. Select the function you want to use from this
menu. You can easily find and use the desired function.
n Searching content with keywords
(Text Search) (vpage65)
n Add to favorites from the Option menu
(Favorite Memory) (vpage67)
n Playing back music and a favorite picture at the
same time (Picture View) (vpage68)
n Playing the last played Internet radio station
This unit memorizes the last played Internet radio station. If you
press INTERNET RADIO to switch to the Internet radio function
from another input source, the last Internet radio station you
listened to is played.
Press INTERNET RADIO.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and
the last played radio station plays.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
54
Listening to internet radio
n Using vTuner to add Internet radio stations to
favorites
There are many Internet radio stations in the world, and this unit
can tune into these stations. But finding the radio station you want
to hear may be difficult, because there are too many stations. If
this is the case, then please use vTuner, an Internet radio station
search website specifically designed for this unit. You can use your
PC to search Internet radio stations and add them as your favorites.
This unit can play radio stations added to vTuner.
1
Check the MAC address of this unit (vpage 127).
The screen that lets you edit the preset name is displayed.
MAC address:
•The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for
vTuner.
2
Use your PC to access the vTuner website
(http://www.radiodenon.com).
The vTuner login screen is displayed.
3
Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.
The account creation screen is displayed.
4
Enter your E-mail address and a password of your
choice.
The account is registered and you can now log in.
5
Enter your account information (E-mail address and
password) and log in.
The top menu of vTuner is displayed.
6
Select the search criteria (genre, region, language,
etc.) of your choice.
The list of radio stations matching the criteria is displayed.
•You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to
hear.
7
Select the radio station of your choice from the list,
and then click the Add to Favorites icon.
The screen that lets you create a favorite group is displayed.
8
Enter the name of the favorite group, then click
“Go”.
A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is
created.
•Internet radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played
from “radiodenon.com” (vpage52) with this unit.
n Internet radio operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
INTERNET RADIO Last played internet radio station
FAVORITE
STATION 1 – 3
Add/call up favorites
CH/PAGE df
Page search
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
OPTION
Text Search /
Favorite Memory /
Picture View
uio p
Cursor operation
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
55
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a PC and on Network Attached
Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.
Important information
•The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server using technologies shown below.
•Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
•Windows Media DRM10
•File types that this unit can play back and specifications are shown below.
GSupported file typesH
Supported file types Media server
z1
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
P
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)
P
WAV
P
MPEG-4 AAC
P
z2
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
P
JPEG
P
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play
music files via a network.
z1 Media server
•This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
•This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
•This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
•If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 ×
349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played back properly.
•WAV format Quantization bit length: 16 bits.
•FLAC format Quantization bit length: 16 or 24 bits.
z2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in
WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on
the computer’s settings.
NOTE
File types that this unit does not support are not displayed.
GSpecifications of supported filesH
Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension
WMA (Windows Media Audio) 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps .wma
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz .wav
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz .flac
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
56
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
Applying media sharing settings
Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and
NAS on the network.
n Sharing media stored in PC
If you are using a media server, be sure to apply this setting first.
When using Windows Media Player 12
(Windows 7)
NOTE
Perform this procedure after changing the control panel display to
“Category”.
1
In the PC’s “Control Panel”, select “Network
and Internet” - “Choose homegroup and sharing
options”.
2
Select the “Stream my pictures, music, and videos
to all devices on my home network” check box and
select “Choose media streaming options”.
3
Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “AVR-
2313”.
4
Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media
programs on this PC and remote connections...”.
5
Click “OK” to nish.
When using Windows Media Player 11
1
Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
2
Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.
3
Click the “Share my media” check box, select “AVR-
2313”, and then click “Allow”.
4
As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device
(other PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a
media controller, and then click “Allow”.
5
Click “OK” to nish.
Sharing media stored in NAS
Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs
and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For
details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
57
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Settings” (vpage128).
e Prepare the computer (vComputer’s operating
instructions).
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Media
Server”, then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Network
4
Use ui to select the server including the le to be
played, then press ENTER or p.
5
Use ui to select the search item or folder, then
press ENTER or p.
6
Repeat step 4 until the le is displayed.
7
Use ui to select the le, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
n Adjusting the sound quality (Restorer)
Make this setting at “Restorer” (vpage107) in the menu.
You can use the “Restorer” function to restore to a state close
to the audio before compression while correcting the bass feel to
enjoy a richer playback experience. The default setting is “Mode
3 (Low)”.
n Switching the screen display
Press STATUS on the main unit.
The display switches between track title, artist name, and album
title each time the button is pressed.
n Going back to the previous screen
Press o or BACK.
n Changing the screen display duration
Make this setting at “Audio Display” (vpage115) in the menu.
The default setting is “30s”.
Press uio p while the display is off to return to the original
screen.
•When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file
includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the
music files are playing.
•If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for
WMA files can be displayed.
•WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting
transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11 or later.
NOTE
•Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
•The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on
the server specifications. If the tracks/ files are not displayed in
alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the
first letter may not work properly.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
58
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
Operations available through the OPTION button
Press the OPTION button to display a menu of functions that can be
used on the TV screen. Select the function you want to use from this
menu. You can easily find and use the desired function.
n Searching content with keywords
(Text Search) (vpage65)
n Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
(vpage66)
n Performing random playback (Random)
(vpage66)
n Add to favorites from the Option menu
(Favorite Memory) (vpage67)
n Playing back music and a favorite picture at the
same time (Picture View) (vpage68)
n Playing back still images in sequential order
(Slideshow) (vpage68)
n Media server operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
FAVORITE
STATION 1 – 3
Add/call up favorites
CH/PAGE df
Page search
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
OPTION
Text Search /
Repeat playback /
Random playback /
Favorite Memory /
Picture View /
Slideshow
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
8 9
Auto search (cue)
1/3
Playback / Pause
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
59
Using online services
This unit supports playback of the online services shown below.
n About Last.fm (vpage60)
Last.fm learns what you love... and it’s a great way to discover new music.
Your new DENON AV receiver is very clever. You can create a free Last.fm profile when you start using
your DENON AV receiver and magically keep track of all the songs you hear.
When you sign in at http://www.last.fm, you can see your top music charts, view thousands of reviews,
biographies and artwork, and get recommendations for local performances you won’t want to miss.
With an affordable subscription you can enjoy an endless choice of personalised ad-free radio stations.
Check out http://www.last.fm/subscribe today for more details.
Your subscription also gives you access to Last.fm radio on a great range of music products, including
your DENON AV Receiver. This feature is not available in all countries.
Visit http://www.last.fm/hardware to find out more.
n About Flickr (vpage63)
Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004. You can use the this unit to view
photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr. To
view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account in order to upload these photographs
to the Flickr server. For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.flickr.com/
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
60
Using online services
Listening to Last.fm
Last.fm radio is not available in all countries. Please check
http://www.last.fm/hardware for more information. You’ll also need a
subscription. Get one today at http://www.last.fm/subscribe.
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Settings” (vpage128).
e Complete step 3 and obtain a Last.fm account.
•If you already have a Last.fm account, you do not need to
obtain a new account. Use your existing Last.fm account.
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Last.fm”,
then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Network
4
If you have a Last.fm account, press ui to select “I
have a Last.fm account”. Then press ENTER or p.
BACK
I have a Last.fm account
I am new to Last.fm
Cancel Enter
Last.fm Account
•If you do not have a Last.fm account, press i to select “I am new
to Last.fm”. Then press ENTER.
Create an account in accordance with the instructions on the
screen.
5
Use ui p to enter your username and password.
BACK
This service is currently
available in limited countries.
Last.fm Account
Username
Password
OK
Enter Username
Exit
•For character input, see page103.
6
After inputting the username and password, select
“OK”, then press ENTER.
If the username and password match, the top menu for Last.
fm is displayed.
7
Use ui to select menu and then press ENTER.
Popular Stations
Play popular artists and tags in your area.
Your Recent
Stations
Play your recent stations.
Your stations
You can play tracks from the following personalised
stations (“Your Recommended Radio”, “Your
Library”, “Your Friends’ Radio”, “Your Top
Artists”.)
Search Stations
You can search station by Artist or Tag.
8
Use ui to select a station, and press ENTER or 1/3
to start playback.
Playback starts and the following screen appears.
MP3 128kbps
rock Radio
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Next MenuSelect
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
61
9
Menu items on playback screen.
Menu [1/3]
Love this track
Ban this track
Scrobbling (On)
Love this track
Loving tracks improves your Last.fm
recommendations, and you can optionally share
them on popular social networks.
Ban this track
If you ban a track, we won’t play it again. You can
undo this on the Last.fm website.
Scrobbling
Scrobbling sends the tracks you played to your
Last.fm account. You can see charts of the music
you’ve been listening to, get recommendations for
new music and events in your area and share your
listening tastes with your friends. You can turn this
service on or off using this option. The more you
scrobble, the better your recommendations will
become.
NOTE
•The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
•Press BACK to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed,
select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
n Adjusting the sound quality (Restorer)
Make this setting at “Restorer” (vpage107) in the menu.
You can use the “Restorer” function to restore to a state close
to the audio before compression while correcting the bass feel to
enjoy a richer playback experience. The default setting is “Mode3
(Low)”.
n Switching the screen display
Press STATUS on the main unit.
The display switches between track title and radio station name
each time the button is pressed.
n Going back to the previous screen
Press o or BACK.
n Changing the screen display duration
Make this setting at “Audio Display” (vpage115) in the menu.
The default setting is “30s”.
Press uio p while the display is off to return to the original
screen.
n Log out
Disassociate this unit from your Last.fm account.
1
While the Last.fm top menu is
displayed, press BACK.
BACK
Last.fm [1/9]
Log OutExit
Popular tag
Popular Artists
Your Recent Stations
Your Friends’ Radio
Your Top Artists
Your Recommended Radio
Your Library
Are you sure you want to Log out?
Yes No
2
When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.
Using online services
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
62
n Last.fm operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
CH/PAGE df
Page search
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
9
Auto search (cue)
Using online services
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
63
Using online services
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
n Viewing photographs shared by particular users
1
Prepare for playback.
q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s
power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network
(LAN)”).
w If settings are required, make the “Settings” (vpage128).
2
Press NETWORK.
3
Use uio p to select “Flickr”,
then press ENTER.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Network
4
Use ui to select “Add Flickr Contact”, then press
ENTER or p.
OPTION
Flickr [1/2]
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
Option
5
In “Contact”, add the screen name (user name you
want to view) you want to add.
•For character input, see page103.
6
After inputting the “Contact”, press
O K
.
The screen name is added to “Contact”, and the screen name
you entered in Step 5 is displayed on the top screen of Flickr.
•If you enter a screen name that does not exist, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” is displayed. Check and enter the
correct screen name.
7
Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
or p.
Favorites
Displays the favorite photographs of the specified
user.
Photostream
Displays a list of shared photographs.
PhotoSets
Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts
Displays the screen name used by the specified user
in Contacts.
Remove this
Contact
Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
Add this
Contact
Adds a user from Flickr Contact.
8
Use ui to select the le, and then press ENTER or
p.
The selected file is displayed.
n Going back to the previous screen
Press o or BACK.
Operations available through the OPTION button
Press the OPTION button to display a menu of functions that can be
used on the TV screen. Select the function you want to use from this
menu. You can easily find and use the desired function.
n Playing back still images in sequential order
(Slideshow) (vpage68)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
64
Using online services
n Viewing all photographs on Flickr
1
Use ui to select “All Content”, then press ENTER
or p.
OPTION
Flickr [1/2]
Add Flickr Contact
All Content
Option
2
Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER
or p.
Interestingness
Displays photographs that are popular from the
number of user comments or number of times they
are added as favorites.
Recent
Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text
Search for photographs by keyword.
3
Use ui to select the le, and then press ENTER or
p.
The selected file is displayed.
NOTE
Depending on the file format, some photographs cannot be viewed.
n Flickr operation buttons
Operation buttons Function
CH/PAGE df
Page search
INFO
Display of information such as the
source name, volume, and sound mode
name
OPTION Slideshow
uio p
Cursor operation /
Auto search (cue, ui)
ENTER
(Press and release)
Enter
ENTER
(Press and hold)
Stop
BACK Return
SETUP Setup menu
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
65
Convenient functions
Here, we explain how to use convenient functions for NETWORK
sources and USB sources. The source names under the titles of each
function’s description are sources that allow use of these functions.
n Searching content with keywords
(Text Search) (vpage65)
n Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
(vpage66)
n Performing random playback (Random)
(vpage66)
n Favorites function (vpage67)
n Playing back music and a favorite picture at the
same time (Picture View) (vpage68)
n Playing back still images in sequential order
(Slideshow) (vpage68)
Searching content with keywords
(Text Search)
USB
Internet Radio
Media Server
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.
The keyboard input screen is displayed.
OPTION
USB [1/9]
D&M1
D&M2
D&M3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
Option
Text Search
Option
Repeat
Random
Slideshow
3
Enter the rst character of the Internet radio
station or le you want to search for, and then press
O K
.
•For character input, see page103.
“Text Search” searches for Internet radio stations or files that start
with the entered first character from the displayed list.
NOTE
“Text Search” may not work for some lists.
n Playing back a search result content
Use ui to select the content you
want to play, and then press ENTER
or p.
Playback starts.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
66
Convenient functions
Performing repeat playback (Repeat)
USB
Media Server
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
USB
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
MP3 128kbps
Repeat
Option
Random
Picture View
3
Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
OPTION
USB
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
MP3 128kbps
Repeat
Off
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Off One
All
Off
Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One
A file being played is played repeatedly.
All
All files in the folder currently being played are played
repeatedly.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
Performing random playback (Random)
USB
Media Server
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
USB
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
MP3 128kbps
Repeat
Option
Random
Picture View
3
Use o p to select random playback mode.
OPTION
USB
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
MP3 128kbps
Random
Off
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Off On
Off
Disable random playback.
On
Enable random playback.
4
Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
The random playback randomly selects a track to play back from all
tracks every time a track ends. Therefore, the same track may be
played back consecutively.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
67
Convenient functions
Favorites function
There are two ways to add content to favorites:
q Add to favorites from the Option menu
w Add to the FAVORITE STATION button
n Add to favorites from the Option menu
(Favorite Memory)
Internet Radio
Media Server
You can add up to 100 items as favorites for all sources (Internet
Radio and Media Server).
1
While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Favorite Memory”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added
to favorites.
OPTION
Internet Radio
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
MP3 128kbps
Back
Option
Favorite Memory
Option
Picture View
•The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is
completed.
Playing back content added in “Favorite Memory”
1
Press NETWORK.
2
Use uio p to select “Favorites”,
then press ENTER.
Internet Radio
Media Server
Favorites
Network
3
Use ui to select the content you want to play, and
then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts.
n Adding to the FAVORITE STATION button
You can add up to three types of content.
NOTE
•Please note that if you add new content to a number that already
contains content, the older content is deleted.
•The following operations update the database on the media server,
which may make the added music files unplayable.
•When you quit the media server and then restart it.
•When music files are deleted or added on the media server.
While content is playing, press and
hold one of the FAVORITE STATION
1 – 3
buttons for more than 3 seconds.
The content is added to the button you
pressed.
Contents that can be added to the FAVORITE STATION button differ
depending on the input source.
Input source Contents that can be added
FM
Input source / Radio station
Internet Radio
Input source / Internet Radio station
Media Server
Input source / Track
Last.fm
Input source
Flickr
Input source
Favorites
Input source
Playing back content added to the FAVORITE
STATION button
You can easily call up content by pressing the FAVORITE STATION
button.
Press one of the FAVORITE STATION
1 – 3
buttons that you added content
to.
Playback starts.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
68
Convenient functions
n Deleting content added to favorites
(Remove Favorites)
1
Press NETWORK.
2
Use uio p to select “Favorites”,
then press ENTER.
Internet Radio
Media Server
Favorites
Network
3
Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Remove Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is
deleted from favorites.
OPTION
Favorites
Option
Radio Algerienne Chaine 1
FM West 84.2
Remove Favorites
Option
•The display returns to the original screen when the procedure is
completed.
Playing back music and a favorite picture
at the same time (Picture View)
USB
Internet Radio
Media Server
1
Play back a still picture (vpage 63).
2
Play back a music le or Internet radio station
(vpage 52, 57).
3
Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4
Use ui to select “Picture View”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing
is shown on the screen.
OPTION
USB
Title
Now Playing
Artist
Album
00:06 100%
Previous OptionPause
NextBack
MP3 128kbps
Repeat
Option
Random
Picture View
Playing back still images in sequential
order (Slideshow)
You can play back still image (JPEG) files stored on a USB memory
device or media server and pictures on Flickr website as a slide show.
The display time can also be set.
USB
Media Server
Flickr
1
Play back an image and press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2
Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
OPTION
USB [1/9]
D&M1
D&M2
D&M3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
Option
Text Search
Option
Repeat
Random
Slideshow
3
Use o p to set the display time.
•Each time o p is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.
Off 5s 10s 15s
20s60s 30s
Off
The slide show is not played back.
5s – 60s
Set the time for displaying a single image when playing
back images in the slide show.
4
Press ENTER.
The slide show is displayed on the screen.
This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they
are stored in the folder.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
69
AirPlay function
Enjoy music from your iTunes library with high quality sound anywhere
in your home.
Use the Apple Remote app
z
for iPhone, iPod touch and iPad to control
iTunes from any room in your home.
z Available as a free download from the App Store.
n Streaming music stored in iPhone, iPod touch,
or iPad directly to the unit
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later,
you can stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad”
directly to this unit.
1
Make the Wi-Fi settings for iPhone, iPod touch, or
iPad.
•For details, see your device’s manual.
2
Startup iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad music or iPod
app.
is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3
Tap the AirPlay icon .
4
Select the speaker you want to use.
Cancel
DENON AVR-2313
NOTE
In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the
iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume
prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
n Playing iTunes music with this unit
1
Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC
that is connected to the same network as this unit.
2
Turn this unit ON.
Set “IP Control” (vpage127) to “Always On” for this unit.
NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more
standby power.
3
Launch iTunes and click the AirPlay icon
displayed in the lower right of the window and select
this unit from the list.
4
Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.
Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible
speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.
1
Click the AirPlay icon and select “Multiple
Speakers” from the list.
2
Check the speakers you want to use.
Master Volume
Multiple Speakers
My Computer
This Computer
DENON AVR-2313
AirPlay Device
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
70
AirPlay function
n Perform iTunes playback operations with the
remote control unit of this unit
With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song
play, pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
1
Select “Edit” – “Preferences...” on the menu.
2
Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
3
Check “Allow iTunes control from remote speakers”,
and then click “OK”.
OK Cancel
?
Devices
General Playback Sharing Store Parental Advanced
iTunes is not paired with any Remotes
more than 5%Warn when
Delete Backup ...
Device backups:
Forget All Remotes
Reset Sync History
of the data on this computer will be changed
Prevent iPods, iPhones, and iPads from syncing automatically
Allow iTunes control from remote speakers
Devices
• is displayed on the menu screen while
AirPlay is being operated.
•Source input will be switched to
“NETWORK” when AirPlay playback is
started.
•You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing the o or choosing other
input source.
•To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main
unit.
•For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for
iTunes.
•The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
71
Selecting a listening mode (Sound Mode)
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo
playbacks.
Multi-channel audio formats are adopted by many of the contents
including Blu-ray disc and DVD as well as digital broadcasting and
Internet-delivered movies and music.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other
than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
This unit automatically generates a list of all the playable sound
modes based on the input audio format and the current speaker setup
configuration and displays the list on the screen. Therefore, you can
select a correct surround playback mode even if you are not familiar
with sound mode selection. Try out various surround playback modes
and enjoy surround playback in your favorite mode.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed and held
STEREO
MOVIE SOUND
DOLBY PLIIx CINEMA
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats
recorded in discs such as Dolby and DTS but also extended types of
modes that match your speaker configuration including front height
speakers and surround back speakers and “original listening modes”
that create atmosphere of ROCK ARENA and JAZZ CLUB, etc.
The displayed sound modes include the 2-channel stereo playback
mode.
For audio formats recorded in a disc, see the disc jacket.
Selecting a listening mode
1
Play the selected device (vpage 3462).
2
Press and hold MOVIE, MUSIC or
GAME to select a listening mode.
This unit automatically generates and
displays a list of selectable sound
modes.
•Each time MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME is
pressed, the listening mode is switched.
Switches to the listening mode
suitable for enjoying movies and TV
programs.
Switches to the listening mode
suitable for enjoying music.
Switches to the listening mode
suitable for enjoying games.
•Pressing
MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME displays a list of the listening
modes that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC
or GAME, the listening mode changes.
•While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a
listening mode.
•The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound
mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME
recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous
playback.
•If the content played back does not support the previously selected
sound mode, the most standard sound mode for the content is
automatically selected.
Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1
Play the selected device
(vpage 3462).
2
Press PURE to select “DIRECT”.
Direct playback begins.
Pure direct playback
This mode is for playback in higher sound quality than in “DIRECT”
mode. Turn the display of the amplifier off to stop the analog video
circuit. This suppresses the source of noise that affects sound quality.
1
Play the selected device
(vpage 3462).
2
Press PURE to select “PURE DIRECT On”.
The display goes dark, and pure direct playback begins.
In DIRECT and PURE DIRECT listening mode, the following items
cannot be adjusted.
•Tone (vpage107) •MultEQ
®
XT (vpage108)
•Dynamic EQ (vpage109) •Dynamic Volume (vpage109)
•Restorer (vpage107)
NOTE
•Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the
PURE DIRECT mode.
•When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the menu screen is not displayed.
•When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the display turns off and appears
as if there is no electricity.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
72
Selecting a listening mode
n Listening mode
•The following listening modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC, GAME, and PURE buttons.
•Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” (vpage105) to enjoy your favorite sound mode.
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
2-channel
z1
STEREO
DOLBY PLgx Cinema
z2
DOLBY PLg Cinema
z2
/
DOLBY PLg Cinema A-DSX
z4
DOLBY Pro Logic
z2
/
DOLBY Pro Logic A-DSX
z4
DTS NEO:6 Cinema
z2
/
DTS NEO:6 Cinema A-DSX
z4
DOLBY PLgz Height
z2
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
Multi-channel
z3
STEREO
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Cinema
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD /
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z4
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Cinema
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
Dolby Digital
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus /
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Cinema
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz
DTS
DTS SURROUND /
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z4
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS + NEO:6
DTS + PLgx Cinema
DTS + PLgz
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES /
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD MSTR /
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z4
DTS Express /
DTS Express A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx Cinema
DTS-HD + PLgz
PCM/DSD
multi-channel
MULTI CH IN /
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z4
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx Cinema
MULTI IN + PLgz
Multi-channel
z3
MULTI CH STEREO
MONO MOVIE
VIRTUAL
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel source in 5.1 or 7.1-channel
playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or
when only front speakers are used.
z3 Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the
audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For
details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound
modes” (vpage146).
z4 These modes add a front height or front wide channel to
the 5.1 channel surround using Audyssey DSX
®
processing
(vpage109).
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
73
Selecting a listening mode
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES /
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD MSTR /
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z4
DTS Express /
DTS Express A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgx Music
DTS-HD + PLgz
PCM/DSD
multi-channel
MULTI CH IN /
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z4
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgx Music
MULTI IN + PLgz
Multi-channel
z3
MULTI CH STEREO
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
2-channel
z1
STEREO
DOLBY PLgx Music
z2
DOLBY PLg Music
z2
/
DOLBY PLg Music A-DSX
z4
DTS NEO:6 Music
z2
/
DTS NEO:6 Music A-DSX
z4
DOLBY PLgz Height
z2
MULTI CH STEREO
ROCK ARENA
JAZZ CLUB
MATRIX
VIRTUAL
Multi-channel
z3
STEREO
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD /
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z4
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
Dolby Digital
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus /
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx Music
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz
DTS
DTS SURROUND /
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z4
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS + NEO:6
DTS + PLgx Music
DTS + PLgz
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel source in 5.1 or 7.1-channel
playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or
when only front speakers are used.
z3 Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the
audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For
details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound
modes” (vpage146).
z4 These modes add a front height or front wide channel to
the 5.1 channel surround using Audyssey DSX
®
processing
(vpage109).
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
74
Selecting a listening mode
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
All
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
z1 2-channel also includes analog input.
z2 This mode plays back 2-channel source in 5.1 or 7.1-channel
playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or
when only front speakers are used.
z3 Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the
audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For
details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound
modes” (vpage146).
z4 These modes add a front height or front wide channel to
the 5.1 channel surround using Audyssey DSX
®
processing
(vpage109).
Operation
button
Input signal Listening mode
2-channel
z1
STEREO
DOLBY PLgx Game
z2
DOLBY PLg Game
z2
/
DOLBY PLg Game A-DSX
z4
DOLBY PLgz Height
z2
MULTI CH STEREO
VIDEO GAME
VIRTUAL
Multi-channel
z3
STEREO
Dolby Digital
DOLBY DIGITAL /
DOLBY DIGITAL A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz
Dolby TrueHD
DOLBY TrueHD /
DOLBY TrueHD A-DSX
z4
DOLBY TrueHD + EX
DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz
Dolby Digital
Plus
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus /
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A-DSX
z4
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz
DTS
DTS SURROUND /
DTS SURROUND A-DSX
z4
DTS ES DSCRT 6.1
DTS ES MTRX 6.1
DTS 96/24
DTS + NEO:6
DTS + PLgz
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD HI RES /
DTS-HD HI RES A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD MSTR /
DTS-HD MSTR A-DSX
z4
DTS Express /
DTS Express A-DSX
z4
DTS-HD + NEO:6
DTS-HD + PLgz
PCM/DSD
multi-channel
MULTI CH IN /
MULTI CH IN A-DSX
z4
MULTI CH IN 7.1
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
MULTI IN + PLgz
Multi-channel
z3
MULTI CH STEREO
VIDEO GAME
VIRTUAL
Views on the TV screen or display
+ PL z DVD
q ew
q Shows a decoder to be used.
•A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed as “ ”.
w Shows a decoder that creates sound output from the surround
back speakers.
•“+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound from front height
speakers.
e Shows the name of the input source being played back.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
75
Selecting a listening mode
n Description of listening mode types
Dolby listening mode
Listening mode type Description
DOLBY PLgx
z1
This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic gx decoder is used to
play back 2-channel source in 6.1/7.1-channel surround sound including the
surround back channel.
By adding the surround back channel, a stronger surround feeling is obtained
compared to Dolby Pro Logic g.
There are three playback modes: “Cinema” mode that is optimized for movie
playback, “Music” mode that is optimized for music playback, and “Game”
mode that is optimized for game play.
DOLBY PLg This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic g decoder is used to play
back 2-channel source in 5.1-channel surround sound with a natural, realistic
feel.
DOLBY Pro Logic This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic decoder is used to play
2-channel source in 4.1-channel surround sound (Left/Center/Right/Surround
Mono).
DOLBY PLgz
z2
This mode can be selected when a Dolby Pro Logic gz decoder is used to play
back 2-channel source in 7.1-channel surround sound with added front height
channel.
By adding a front height channel, the vertical expression is emphasized,
improving the three-dimensionality of the sound.
DOLBY DIGITAL This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded with Dolby Digital.
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z1
Using a Dolby Digital EX decoder, this mode plays Dolby Digital source in
6.1/7.1 channel surround sound with added surround back channel.
By adding a surround back channel, spacial expressiveness and sound
localization are enhanced.
DOLBY TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded with Dolby Digital
Plus.
z1 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”.
z2 This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” is not set to “None”.
DTS listening mode
Listening mode type Description
DTS NEO:6 This mode can be selected when a DTS NEO:6 decoder is used to play back
2-channel source in 6.1/7.1-channel surround sound including the surround
back channel.
There is a “Cinema” mode optimized for movie playback, and a “Music” mode
optimized for music playback.
DTS SURROUND This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back
channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and
sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z
This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right
channels by a matrix encoder at software recording time is decoded by this
unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround
right, surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
z This can be selected when “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”.
PCM multi-channel listening mode
Listening mode type Description
MULTI CH IN This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM sources .
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
v See overleaf
DVD
76
Selecting a listening mode
Audyssey DSX listening mode
Listening mode type Description
Audyssey DSX
(A-DSX)
z
This mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in
5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide or front high channels, the surround
sound effects sound more three dimensional and realistic.
z This can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”,
and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage122).
Original listening mode
Listening mode type Description
MULTI CH STEREO This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
The same sound as that from the front speakers (L/R) is played back at the
same level from the surround speakers (L/R) and surround back speakers (L/R).
ROCK ARENA This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in an arena.
JAZZ CLUB This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a live concert in a jazz club.
MONO MOVIE This mode is for playing monaural movie sources with surround sound.
When playing sources recorded in monaural in the “MONO MOVIE” mode,
the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right), so input to
both channels.
VIDEO GAME This mode is suited for achieving surround sound with video games.
MATRIX This mode lets you add a spacious feel to stereo music sources.
VIRTUAL This mode is for enjoying surround effects using only the front speakers or
headphones.
STEREO listening mode
Listening mode type Description
STEREO This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
•Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
•If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and
are played.
Direct listening mode
Listening mode type Description
DIRECT Sound recorded in source is played as is.
PURE DIRECT This mode is for playback in higher sound quality than in DIRECT mode.
Turn the display of the amplifier off to stop the analog video circuit. This
suppresses the source of noise that affects sound quality.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Basic version
DVD
Advanced
version
77
F Installation/connection/setup of speakers (Advanced) vpage78
F Playback (Advanced operation) vpage91
F Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room) vpage97
F How to make detailed settings vpage99
Advanced version
Here, we explain functions and operations that let you make better use of this unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
78
Procedure for speaker settings
Speaker installation
Speaker connection (vpage80)
Set up speakers (vpage89)
Speaker installation
•Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers
you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room.
Here, we explain how to install the speakers using a typical example.
•The speaker impedance should be from 6 to 16 Ω.
Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should
be installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.
z1
z2
45˚
Surround
speaker
60 – 90 cm
GViewed from the sideH
Front height
speaker
•Point slightly
downwards
At least
1 m
Surround back
speaker
•Point slightly
downwards
Front
speaker
Front wide
speaker
z1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz
z2 Recommended for Audussey DSX
®
NOTE
You cannot have audio output from the surround back speakers, front
height speakers and front wide speakers simultaneously.
When 7.1ch speakers are installed using surround
back speakers
FL FR
C
SBL SBR
SL
SR
SW
z1
z2
z3
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 90˚ – 110˚ z3 135˚ – 150˚
GSpeaker abbreviationsH
FL Front speaker (L) SL Surround speaker (L)
FR Front speaker (R) SR Surround speaker (R)
C Center speaker SBL Surround back speaker (L)
SW Subwoofer SBR Surround back speaker (R)
Installation/connection/setup of speakers (Advanced)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
79
Speaker installation
When 7.1ch speakers are installed using front
height speakers
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz or Audyssey DSX
®
, install front height
speakers.
FL
FR
FHRFHL
C
SL
SR
SW
z1
z2
z3
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 22˚ – 45˚ z3 90˚ – 110˚
GSpeaker abbreviationsH
FL Front speaker (L) SB Surround back speaker
FR Front speaker (R) FHL Front height speaker (L)
C Center speaker FHR Front height speaker (R)
SW Subwoofer FWL Front wide speaker (L)
SL Surround speaker (L) FWR Front wide speaker (R)
SR Surround speaker (R)
When 7.1ch speakers are installed using front wide
speakers
When using Audyssey DSX
®
, install front wide speakers.
FL
FR
SL
SR
FWL
FWR
SW
C
z1
z2
z3
Listening
position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z3 55˚ – 60˚ z3 90˚ – 110˚
When 6.1ch speakers are installed
FL FR
C
SB
SL
SR
SW
z1
z2
Listening position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 90˚ – 110˚
When 5.1ch speakers are installed
FL FR
SW
C
SL
SR
z1
z2
Listening position
z1 22˚ – 30˚ z2 120˚
When Front A/B speakers are installed
FR(A) FR(B)
SW
FL(B) FL(A)
Listening position
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
80
Speaker connection
Here, we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.
This section explains how to connect them using a typical example.
n Connecting 7.1-channel speakers using surround back speakers (vpage81)
n Connecting 7.1-channel speakers using front height speakers (vpage82)
n Connecting 7.1-channel speakers using front wide speakers (vpage83)
n Connecting 6.1-channel speakers using one surround back speaker (vpage84)
n Connecting 5.1-channel speakers (vpage85)
n Connecting front A/B speakers (vpage86)
n Connecting 2.1-channel speakers (vpage87)
n Connecting front speakers with a bi-amp connection (vpage88)
NOTE
•Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. Also,
turn off the subwoofer.
•Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The
protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and – sides
touch each other (vpage153 “Protection Circuit”).
•Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected. Doing so could result
in electric shock. When the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the “Setup
Assistant” screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while
the “Setup Assistant” is running.)
•Use speakers with the speaker impedances shown below.
Speaker terminals Speaker impedance
FRONT
6 – 16 Ω
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
Connecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – (black) polarities on the speakers being
connected to this unit, and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly.
1
Peel off about 10 mm of sheathing from the tip of the speaker
cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.
2
Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.
3
Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to the hilt into the speaker
terminal.
4
Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.
Connecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer.
n For connecting two subwoofers
Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
The same signal is output from each subwoofer
terminal.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
81
Speaker connection
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers using surround back speakers
The illustration on the right shows a connection example for performing 7.1-channel playback using the
surround back speakers.
To perform 7.1-channel playback using the surround back speakers, set “Assign Mode” to “Surround
Back” in steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage89).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
FL FR
C
SL
SR
SW
SBL SBR
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
82
FL FR
C
SL
SR
SW
FHRFHL
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers using front height speakers
The illustration on the right shows a connection example for performing 7.1-channel playback using the
front height speakers.
To perform 7.1-channel playback using the front height speaker, set “Assign Mode” to “Front Height” in
steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage89).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
When using Dolby Pro Logic gz or Audyssey DSX
®
, install front height speakers.
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
Speaker connection
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
83
FL FR
C
SL
SR
SW
FWR
FWL
Connecting 7.1-channel speakers using front wide speakers
The illustration on the right shows a connection example for performing 7.1-channel playback using the
front wide speakers.
To perform 7.1-channel playback using the front wide speaker, set “Assign Mode” to “Front Wide” in
steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage89).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
When using Audyssey DSX
®
, install front wide speakers.
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
Speaker connection
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
84
Speaker connection
Connecting 6.1-channel speakers using one surround back
speaker
If using only one surround back speaker, connect to the “L” side of the SURROUND BACK terminal.
For speaker settings in this case, see “When 6.1ch speakers are installed” (vpage79).
To perform 6.1-channel playback using the surround back speaker, set “Assign Mode” to “Surround Back”
in steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage89).
Also use the “Speaker Config.” setting (vpage123) to set “Surr. Back” to “1spkr”.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
FL FR
C
SL
SR
SW
SB
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
85
Speaker connection
SL
SR
FL FR
C
SW
Connecting 5.1-channel speakers
To perform 5.1-channel playback, set “Assign Mode” to “Surround Back” in steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp
Assign”” (vpage89).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
86
Speaker connection
FL(A)FL(B) FR(B)FR(A)
SW
Connecting front A/B speakers
You can connect a second set of speakers to this unit and use them for playback.
In this case, set “Assign Mode” to “Front B” in steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage89).
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
For multichannel playback, connect center, surround, surround back, and front speakers and a subwoofer.
Front speakers can be used separately, depending on the speaker’s specifications or playback source such
as front speakers (A) for multichannel playback and front speakers (B) for 2-channel playback (vpage125
“Front Speaker Setup”).
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
87
Speaker connection
FL FR
SW
Connecting 2.1-channel speakers
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
n For connecting two subwoofers
Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit.
The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
88
Speaker connection
FL FR
SW
wq wq
(R) (L)
Connecting front speakers with a bi-amp connection
•You cannot use surround back speakers in a bi-amp connection. Use front speakers that support a bi-amp
connection and connect the speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals and the SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.
In this case, set “Assign Mode” to “Bi-AMP” in steps 3 to 5 for “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage89).
•A bi-amp connection is to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminals and woofer terminals of
speakers compatible with the bi-amp function. This prevents the back electromotive force (returned force
without output) of the woofer sent to the tweeter, which affects the sound quality of the tweeter, and
you can enjoy playback with higher-quality sound.
Cables used for connections
Audio cable (sold separately)
Speaker
cable
Subwoofer
cable
For multichannel playback, connect front, center, surround, and surround back speakers and a subwoofer.
NOTE
•For speaker cable connections, see page80.
•For speaker impedance , see page80.
•When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the
speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
89
1
Set up the
remote control unit
n Set up the zone mode
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN
ZONE.
MAIN lights.
Press MAIN
2
Connect the setup microphone.
Audyssey Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
When the setup microphone is
connected, the following screen is
displayed.
Set up speakers
around items indicate the settings.
First install and connect the speakers to this unit.
Before Audyssey
®
Setup measurement, the settings shown below can be made.
•Changing the amplifier assignment (Amp Assign)
The signal output from the SURROUND BACK speaker terminal of this unit can be switched to match your speaker environment (vpage89 “Set up “Amp Assign””).
•Setting the channels to be used (Channel Select)
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers (vpage90
“Set up “Channel Select””).
3
Set up “Amp Assign”
Use ui to select “Amp Assign”, and then press
ENTER.
Amp Assign
Assign Mode Surround Back
ZONE2:
Selects how to use the internal amplifiers
Audyssey Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
4
Select “Assign Mode”, and then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
90
Set up speakers
7
Set up “Channel Select”
Use ui to select “Channel Select”, and then press
ENTER.
Channel Select
Subwoofer Measure
Audyssey Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
8
Use ui to select a channel, and then press ENTER.
Front
Select for setting the front speakers to be used. In this
case, go to step 9.
•“Front” can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to
“Front B”.
Subwoofer
Select for no subwoofers to be used. In this case, go
to step 10.
Surround
Back
Select the number of surround back speakers to be
used. In this case, go to step 11.
•“Surround Back” can be set when “Assign Mode” is
set to “Surround Back”.
9
Use o p to select a front speaker, and then press
ENTER.
A Select this to use front speaker A.
B
Select this to use front speaker B.
A+B
Select this to use front speakers A and B simultaneously.
10
Use o p to set whether or not a subwoofer channel is
measured, and then press ENTER.
Measure Set for measuring a subwoofer.
Skip
Set for no measuring of a subwoofer.
11
Use o p to set whether or not a surround back
channel is measured, and then press ENTER.
Measure
(2spkrs)
Set for measuring two surround back speakers.
Measure
(1spkr)
Set for measuring a surround back speaker.
Skip
Set for no measuring of a surround back speaker.
12
Press o or BACK.
Proceed to page28
Preparation
step 5.
NOTE
After performing Audyssey
®
Setup, do not change the speaker
connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform
Audyssey
®
Setup again.
5
Use o p to select the
conguration of the connected
speakers, and then press
ENTER.
Surround Back
Setting for 7.1-channel playback using surround
back speakers.
ZONE2
Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power amplifier
for ZONE2 and output the audio in stereo.
Bi-AMP
Setting to use the front speakers via the bi-amp
connection.
Front B
Setting to use the second set of front speakers for
playback.
Front Height
Setting for 7.1-channel playback using front height
speakers.
Front Wide
Setting for 7.1-channel playback using front wide
speakers.
6
Press o or BACK to exit the “Amp Assign” setting.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
91
Setup (vpage26)
Playback (Basic operation) (vpage33)
Selecting a listening mode (Sound Mode)
(vpage71)
n HDMI control function (vpage91)
n Sleep timer function (vpage92)
n Quick select function (vpage93)
n REC OUT mode (vpage94)
n Web control function (vpage95)
n Various memory functions (vpage96)
Playback (Advanced operation)
HDMI control function
If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
n Operations possible by HDMI control
•This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
•You can switch audio output devices with a TV operation.
When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output
setup operation, you can switch the amp power on.
•You can adjust this unit volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
•You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV
input switching.
•When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.
•If you switch the input source of the unit to “TV AUDIO”, you
can play TV audio with this unit (vpage 8 “About ARC
(Audio Return Channel) function”).
•When “HDMI Control” (vpage 113) in the menu is set to
“On”, signals input to the HDMI input connector are output to
the television or other device connected to the HDMI output
connector, even if the power of this unit is in standby (pass-
through function).
•To use this unit to play the audio of a TV that does not support
the ARC function, connect the TV with an optical-digital or analog
connection (vpage8).
•To use the pass-through function, connect an HDMI connection
device that is compatible with HDMI control.
n Setting procedure
1
Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with
the HDMI control function.
Set “HDMI Control” (vpage113) to “On”.
2
Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.
3
Set the HDMI control function for all devices
connected by HDMI cable.
•Please consult the operating instructions for the connected devices
to check the settings.
•Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4
Switch the television input to the HDMI input
connected to this unit.
5
Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and
check if the picture from the player is ok.
6
When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check
that the power of this unit also goes to standby.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
92
HDMI control function
If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the
following points.
•Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function?
•Is “HDMI Control” (vpage113) set to “On”?
•Is “Power Off Control” (vpage113) set to “All” or “Video”?
•Is “Control Monitor” (vpage 113 set for the monitor output
connected to television?
•Is the “Control Monitor” setting (vpage 113) of the menu set
to the TV that uses the HDMI control function when this unit is
connected to two TVs that support HDMI connectors?
•Are the HDMI control function settings of all devices correct?
NOTE
•When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more standby
power.
•The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is
compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV
and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.
•Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV
or player. Check the owner’s manual of each device for details
beforehand.
•When “Power Off Control” on the menu is set to “Off”
(vpage113), this unit is not set to standby even if the connected
device is in the standby mode.
•When connection changes are implemented, such as adding
connections to HDMI devices, linked operations may be initialized.
In this case, you will need to reconfigure the settings.
•When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it is not possible to assign an
HDMI connector to “TV AUDIO” at “Input Assign” (vpage117).
•Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking
function may be reset, in which case, repeat steps 2 and 3.
•“Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage117) setting has changed.
•“Video Output” (vpage112) setting is changed.
•There is a change to the connection between the devices and the
HDMI, or an increase in devices.
Sleep timer function
•You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a
set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening
while going to sleep.
•The sleep timer function can be set for each zone (vpage 98
“Sleep timer function”). (The MAIN ZONE setting method is
explained here.)
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN
ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SLEEP and display the time
you want to set.
The indicator on the display
lights.
•The time switches as shown below
each time SLEEP is pressed.
Off 10 min 20 30 40 50
6080 7090100
110
120
To confirm the countdown time before putting the
unit to sleep
Press SLEEP.
“Sleep : zmin” appears on the display.
z Countdown time
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “Off”.
The indicator on the display turns off.
•The sleep timer setting is canceled if this unit’s power is set to
standby.
•The sleep timer function can be set separately for the different zones
(vpage98 “Sleep timer function”).
NOTE
The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices
connected to this unit. To turn off the power of those connected
devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
93
Quick select function
You can save settings such as the input source selection, volume
level, and sound mode at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the set QUICK SELECT buttons for
subsequent playback to switch to various saved settings all at once.
•By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 – 4
buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback
environment.
Press QUICK SELECT.
The Quick Select settings for the button you pressed are called up.
•The default settings of each QUICK SELECT are as shown below.
Button Input source Volume
Sound
Mode
QUICK SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40 STEREO
QUICK SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40 STEREO
QUICK SELECT 3 GAME 40 STEREO
QUICK SELECT 4 NETWORK 40 STEREO
Changing the Quick Select Name
On this unit, you can change the Quick Select name displayed on the
menu to the name that you prefer.
For the name change method, see “Quick Select Names”
(vpage132).
n Changing the settings
1
Set the items below to the settings you want to save.
q Input source
z
(vpage33)
w Volume (vpage34)
e Sound Mode (vpage71)
r Audyssey
(Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
, Audyssey
Dynamic Volume
®
) (vpage108)
2
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until
“Quickz Memory” appears on the display.
The current settings will be memorized.
z The number for the
QUICK SELECT button you pressed is
displayed.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
94
REC OUT mode
•When using the audio/video recording connectors (MEDIA PLAYER
outputs), you can record the audio or video from a different program
source while listening to the currently played track.
•For the connection method, see “Connecting a media player”
(vpage18).
1
Press ZONE2 / REC SOURCE until “RECOUT
SOURCE” is displayed.
2
Press ZONE2 / REC SOURCE to choose the input
source to be recorded.
ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 CBL/SAT ZONE2 DVD
····
····
RECOUT DVD RECOUT CBL/SAT RECOUT SOURCE
3
Start recording.
•For operating instructions, refer to the respective device’s
operating instructions.
•To cancel, press ZONE2 / REC SOURCE until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is
displayed.
•Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.
•The digital signal input into the HDMI, COAXIAL and OPTICAL
connectors is not output from the analog REC OUT connector.
•Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2
as well.
•The operable buttons on the remote control unit in REC OUT mode
while it is in the operating mode for ZONE2 are as follows:
•ZONE SELECT buttons
•MUTE button (:)
•VOLUME button (df)
NOTE
•Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should
not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright
holder.
•Input sources for which “Hide” is selected at “Hide Sources”
(vpage119) cannot be selected.
•To record video signals through this unit, use the video cable for
connection between this unit and the player.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
95
Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
•This unit and the PC need to be connected to the network properly
(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”) in order to
use the web control function.
•Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you
may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case,
then change the settings of the security-related software.
1
Switch the “IP Control” setting to “Always On”
(vpage 127).
2
Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”
(vpage 127).
Displays the current network settings of the AVR
Network/Information
Friendly name
DHCP
IP Address
MAC Address
DENON AVR-2313
On
192.168.100.19
0005cd000000
Checking the IP address.
3
Start up the web browser.
4
Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”,
enter “http://192.168.100.19/”.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
DENON AVR-2313
Web Controller
Web Controller Config.
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
40.0
CBL/SAT
Blu-ray
Setup Menu
q
q Entering the IP address.
•By adding this unit’s IP address to the browser’s bookmark,
you can display the web control screen using the bookmark
function the next time you use the browser. If you are using a
DHCP server and “IP Control” (vpage 127) is set to “Off In
Standby”, turning the power on/off changes the IP address.
5
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.
http://192.168.100.19/index.asp
INDEX
File
Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
DENON AVR-2313
Web Controller
Web Controller Config.
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
40.0
CBL/SAT
Blu-ray
Setup Menu
w
e
r
w Click when you select the zone to operate. (vGExample 1H)
e Click when you operate the setup menu.
r Click to change the Web control screen setting.
(vGExample 3H)
6
Operate.
GExample 1H MAIN ZONE control screen
ZONE CONTROL
NETWORK
iPod/USB
FM
QUICK SELECT
RELOAD
Add To Your Favorite
Top Menu
MAIN ZONE
SLEEP
40.0
DENON AVR-2313
CBL/SAT
FAVORITE STATION
STEREO
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX MEDIA PLAYER
iPod/USB
CD
FM
NETWORK
TV AUDIO
Internet Radio
1 2 3
MOVIE
DIRECT STEREO
STANDARD SIMULATION
MUSIC GAME PURE
u
t
i
y
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q5
Q3
Q4
Q6
o
t Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.
The display on the right becomes the individual setting screens.
(vGExample 4H)
y Click when you perform a power operation of the unit.
u Click when you update to the latest information.
Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time
you operate. When operating from the main unit, click this or else
the screen will not be updated.
i Click to add a setting to “Favorites” in your browser.
We recommend registering the setting screens for the different
zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform
menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate.
o Click to return to the top menu.
Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in
GExample 3H
Q0 To adjust the main volume, click “<”, “>”, or the volume display.
Q1 Click “v” to set the sleep timer function.
Q2 Displays the name of the selected input source.
Q3 Click a button to change the input source.
Q4 Callback your favorite content.
Q5 Displays the sound mode.
Q6 The sound mode switches each time you click the button.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
96
Web control function
GExample 2H Setup menu screen
VIDEO
AUDIO
PICTURE ADJUST
HDMI SETUP
OUTPUT SETTINGS
VOLUME DISPLAY
VIDEO
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
NETWORK
USER ACCOUNT
GENERAL
INFORMATION
FIRMWARE
SAVE
LOAD
Contrast
Brightness
Saturation
Hue
Enhancer
0
Set
0
Set
0
Set
0
Set
0
Set
Auto Lip Sync
ON
*****
*****
OFF
HDMI Audio Out
AVR TV
i/p Scaler
Analog OFF
Resolution
Auto 480p/576p 1080i
Bottom Top OFF
720p 1080p 4K
Aspect Ratio
16:9 4:3
HDMI Control
Video Output
ON OFF
Auto(Dual) Monitor1 Monitor2
Standby Source
Control Monitor
*****
Power Off Control
Q7
W0
Q9
Q8
Q7 Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.
The display on the right becomes the individual setting screens.
Q8 Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click “LOAD”
when you want to call settings.
Q9 Enter figures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then
click “Set”.
W0 Click an item to make a setting.
GExample 3H Web configuration screen
Top Menu Link Setup
ON OFF
Web Controller Config.
Back Top Menu
W1
W2
W1 Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup.
When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen.
(Default setting : “OFF”)
W2 Click this item to return to the top menu.
GExample 4H Network audio operating screen
ZONE CONTROL
NETWORK
iPod/USB
FM
QUICK SELECT
RELOAD
40.0
NETWORK (MAIN ZONE)
Network
8 921/3
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
W3
W4
W5
W3 Click to return to the previous screen.
W4 Click the content you want to operate.
W5 Use to operate content.
Various memory functions
Personal memory plus function
This function sets the settings (input mode, sound mode, HDMI output
mode, MultEQ
®
XT, Dynamic EQ, audio delay etc.) last selected for
the individual input sources.
The surround parameters, tone settings and the volumes of the
different speakers are stored for the individual sound modes.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into
the standby mode.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
97
Playback in ZONE2 (Separate room)
•You can operate this unit so as to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2) other than the MAIN ZONE (room where
the unit is located).
•You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2. You can also
play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2.
The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording output connectors (MEDIA PLAYER).
Audio output
It is possible to play 2-channel audio in rooms other than the MAIN ZONE where multi-channel playback is
done. Choose one of the methods.
q Zone playback by speaker output
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
Use an external amplifier.
q Zone playback by speaker output
•Set the “Assign Mode” (vpage122) setting to “ZONE2”, and outputs ZONE2 audio from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals (The default setting is “Surround Back”).
•If you set the“Assign Mode” (vpage122) setting to “ZONE2”, the main zone home theater system
can play back up to 5.1 channels. Even if you play back audio recorded in 6.1 or 7.1 channels, this unit
automatically downmixes the audio to 5.1 channels.
n Connecting and setting the speakers
“Assign Mode” setting (vpage122)
and audio signals output
Connecting the speakers
ZONE2
Output signal :
Stereo (L / R)
ZONE2
w q w q
(L) (R)
w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)
n Audio connections (ZONE2)
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 amplifiers and
played on these amplifiers.
AUX IN
R
L
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
This unit
Power
amplifiers
We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.
NOTE
It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI terminals in ZONE2.
Use analog connections for ZONE2 playback.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
98
Playback
1
Press ZONE2 to switch the zone
mode to the ZONE2.
ZONE2 lights.
Input source
select buttons
2
Press POWER X to turn on the
ZONE2 power.
The indicator on the display lights.
•Also press input source select button when
in standby mode, the power turns on.
•When
POWER X is pressed, ZONE2 turns
off.
•Power in ZONE2 can be turned on or off by
pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3
Press the input source select
button to select the input source
to be played.
The audio signal of the selected source
is output to ZONE2.
•To perform an operation with the main unit,
press
ZONE2/REC SOURCE many times.
Each time you press ZONE2/REC SOURCE,
the input source changes.
When power for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 is set to ON, power
of the MAIN ZONE only can be turned off. In Step 1, press MAIN and
POWER X in this order.
Adjusting the volume
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
GAdjustable rangeH
0 – 40 – 98
(When the “Scale” (vpage108) setting is “0 – 98”)
GAdjustable rangeH
– – –
–79dB – –40dB – 18dB
(When the “Scale” (vpage108) setting is “–79.5dB – 18.0dB”)
•At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage 131) is set to “70
(–10dB)”.
Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF on the main
unit to adjust the sound volume.
Turning off the sound temporarily
Press MUTE :.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage131)
in the menu.
•To cancel, either adjust the volume or press MUTE : again.
•The setting can also be cancelled by adjusting the volume or turning
off the ZONE2 power.
You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 in “ZONE2 Setup”
(vpage131) in the menu.
Sleep timer function
•This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep in
ZONE2.
•The sleep timer function can be set by zone.
1
Press ZONE2 to switch the zone
mode to the ZONE2.
ZONE2 lights.
2
Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
•The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is pressed.
Off 10 min 20 30 40 50
6080 7090100
110
120
To confirm the countdown time before putting the
unit to sleep
Press SLEEP.
“Z2 Sleep : zmin” appears on the display.
z Countdown time
To cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to set “Off”.
The sleep timer is also cancelled when this unit is set to the standby
mode or the ZONE2 power is turned off.
NOTE
The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices
connected to this unit. To turn off the power of those connected
devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
99
Menu map
For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and display the menu on the TV screen. For menu operations, see the following page.
By default, this unit has recommended settings defined. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
How to make detailed settings
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
Audio
Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters.
105
Tone Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
107
Dialogue Level Sets the output level to clarify the dialogue
output from the center channel.
107
Subwoofer Level Sets the subwoofer on/off and its output level.
107
Restorer Expands the low and high frequency components
of compressed audio to enable richer audio
playback.
107
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video
and audio.
108
Volume Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is
located) volume setting.
108
Audyssey Makes Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
settings.
108
Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of
each speaker.
110
Video
Picture Adjust Adjusts the picture quality.
112
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.
112
Output Settings Makes screen-related settings.
113
Volume Display Sets where to display the master volume level.
114
Info Display Displays status of operation temporarily when
the sound mode is changed, or input source is
switched. You can set whether or not to show
each of these status displays.
115
Audio Display Sets how long each menu is displayed when the
input source is “NETWORK”, “iPod/USB”, or
“FM”.
115
TV Format Set the video signal format to be output for the
TV you are using.
115
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
Inputs
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment.
117
Source Rename Changes the display name for this source.
118
Hide Sources Remove from the display input sources that are
not used.
119
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.
119
Input Select Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.
119
Video Source Video of another input source is played back
combined with the playing audio.
120
Speakers
Audyssey
®
Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected
speakers and listening room are measured and
the optimum settings are made automatically.
26,89
Manual Setup Perform when setting the speakers manually
or when changing settings made in Audyssey
®
Setup.
122
Network
Information Display network information.
127
IP Control Set the network function on/off during standby.
127
Friendly Name The Friendly Name is the name of this unit
displayed on the network. You can change the
Friendly Name according to your preferences.
127
Settings Make settings for wired LAN.
128
Last.fm Display Set whether or not to display Last.fm item on the
menu.
129
Maintenance Mode Use when receiving maintenance from a DENON
service engineer or custom installer.
129
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
100
Menu map
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
General
Language Sets the language for display the menu on the
TV screen.
131
ZONE2 Setup Makes settings for audio playback in a ZONE2
system.
131
Zone Rename Change the display title of each zone to one you
prefer.
131
Quick Select Names Change the “Quick Select” display title to one
you prefer.
132
Trigger Out Selects when to activate trigger out.
132
Auto Standby When you do not perform any operation on this
unit with no audio or video input for a specified
time, this unit automatically enters the standby
mode. Before it enters the standby mode, “Auto
Standby” is displayed on the display of this unit
and the menu screen.
132
Front Display Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
132
Information Show information about receiver settings, input
signals, etc.
133
Firmware Set whether or not to check for firmware update,
update the firmware, and display update and
upgrade notifications.
134
Setup Lock Protect settings from inadvertent change.
135
Setup
Assistant
Perform the installation, connection, and setup procedures to prepare the
unit for operation following guidance.
C 7
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
101
Examples of menu screen displays
Typical examples are described below.
GExample 1H
Menu selection screen (Top menu)
Audio [1/2]
Surround Parameter
Tone
Dialogue Level
Subwoofer Level
Restorer
Audio Delay
Volume
Audyssey
Adjust surround sound parameters
q Currently selected setup icon
w List of GUI menu setup icons
e Currently selected setup item
r List of GUI menu setup items
Use ui to select “Audio”
and then press p.
(Or press ENTER.)
u
t
y
Setup Menu
Audio
Video
Inputs
Speakers
Network
General
Setup Assistant
r
e
q
w
t Indication of there being following pages
y Selected setup item
u Guide text for the currently selected setup item
GExample 2H
Audyssey
®
Setup screen (with illustration)
Channel Select
Audyssey Setup
Amp Assign
Channel Select
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone.
Set the following items
if necessary.
o
Q1
Q0
i Currently selected setup icon
o Operation guidance text
Q0 Illustration
Q1 Selected setup item
i
NOTE
When the menu is operated on a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA)
or during playback of certain 3D video content, the playback image
switches to the menu screen image.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
102
Examples of menu and front display
Below we describe typical examples of displays on the TV screen and on the set’s display window.
Menu display Front display Description
Top menu display
Setup Menu
Audio
Video
Inputs
Speakers
Network
General
Setup Assistant
w
w
Audio
q Press SETUP to display the menu screen.
w TV screen: Displays the selected line.
Display: Displays the selected item.
•Use ui to move to the item you want to set.
Display when changing settings
DIGITALHDMI COMP
Inputs/Input Assign [1/2]
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
MEDIA PLAYER
TV AUDIO
AUX
COAX1
COAX2
None
None
None
OPT1
None
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
None
HDMI6
COMP1
COMP2
None
None
None
None
None
Changes HDMI input assignments
q
DIGITALHDMI COMP
Inputs/Input Assign [1/2]
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
MEDIA PLAYER
TV AUDIO
AUX
COAX1
COAX2
None
None
None
OPT1
None
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
None
HDMI6
COMP1
COMP2
None
None
None
None
None
Changes HDMI input assignments
w
Press ENTER.
q
CBL/SAT [COAX1 ]
e
CBL/SAT COAX1
Press ENTER.
q TV screen: Displays the selected line.
Display: Displays the selected item.
•Use
ui to move to the item you want to set.
w Press ENTER to set to the mode in which the setting can be made.
e 0 1 is displayed at the sides of items whose setting can be changed.
Use o p to change to the desired setting.
Display when returning to the
settings in effect at time of purchase
DIGITALHDMI COMP
Inputs/Input Assign [1/2]
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
MEDIA PLAYER
TV AUDIO
AUX
COAX1
COAX2
None
None
None
OPT1
None
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
None
HDMI6
COMP1
COMP2
None
None
None
None
None
Resets all surround parameters to the factory defaults
Reset to the default values?
Yes No
w
Press ENTER.
DIGITALHDMI COMP
Inputs/Input Assign [1/2]
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
MEDIA PLAYER
TV AUDIO
AUX
COAX1
COAX2
None
None
None
OPT1
None
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
None
HDMI6
COMP1
COMP2
None
None
None
None
None
Resets all surround parameters to the factory defaults
q
w
Default :No
q
Default
Press ENTER.
q Press
u to select “Set Defaults”, then press ENTER.
w Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
103
Inputting characters
On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following
screens to the names that you prefer.
•Text Search (vpage65)
•Preset Name (vpage46)
•Source Rename (vpage118)
•Friendly Name (vpage127)
•Zone Rename (vpage131)
•Quick Select Names (vpage132)
•Character input for the network functions
(vpage52, 60, 63, 129)
Keyboard screen
Select a character on the TV screen to input characters.
n Display of a keyboard input screen
Inputs/Source Rename
Allows you to change the names of the source inputs
CBL/SAT
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
=
M
Z
#
>
a/A SPACE INSERT DELETE O K
q
w
e
r
t y u oi
q Character input section
w Cursor
e Keyboard section
r Uppercase and lowercase switch key
t Space key
y Cursor keys
u Insert key
i Delete key
o OK key
n Input method
1
Display the screen for inputting
characters (vpage 99 “Menu
map”).
2
Select a character to be changed.
q Use uio p to select or .
w Press ENTER to place the cursor at the character
to be changed.
Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one
character.
3
Select a character to be input with uio p then
press ENTER.
•The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.
GUpper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789
! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) z + , ; < = >
GLower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ’ { | }
•When you use
ui while you type in, you can change uppercase
characters to lowercase and vice versa.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name.
5
Use uio p to select
O K
, then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
104
Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press o or BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “Audio” procedure
Surround Parameter (vpage105)
Tone (vpage107)
Dialogue Level (vpage107)
Subwoofer Level (vpage107)
Restorer (vpage107)
Audio Delay (vpage108)
Volume (vpage108)
Audyssey (vpage108)
Graphic EQ (vpage110)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
105
Setting items Setting details
Center Image
Distributes the dialogue
output from the center
channel to the front left and
right channels and widens
the sound image in the
front. You can set this when
the sound mode is set to
DTS NEO:6 in the “Music”
mode.
0.0 – 1.0 (0.3)
The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front
left and right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the
front.
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also
to surround channels for
wider sound. You can set
this when the sound mode
is Dolby PLg in the “Music”
mode.
On : Set.
Off : Do not set.
Dimension
Shift sound image center
to front or rear to adjust
playback balance. You can
set this when the sound
mode is Dolby PLg in the
“Music” mode.
0 – 6 (3)
As you set a smaller number, the surround sound field shifts backward;
as you set a larger number, the surround sound field shifts forward.
Center Width
Distributes the dialogue
output from the center
channel to left and right
channels and widens the
sound image in the front.
You can set this when the
sound mode is Dolby PLgx
in the “Music” mode.
0 – 7 (3)
The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front
left and right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the
front.
Surround Parameter
Default settings are underlined.
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set
sound mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters”
(vpage143).
NOTE
•Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.
•When the sound mode is “PURE DIRECT”, you cannot set the surround parameters.
Setting items Setting details
Cinema EQ
Softens the treble range
of movie soundtracks for
better understanding.
On : “Cinema EQ” is used.
Off : “Cinema EQ” is not used.
Loudness Management
This can be set in the
Dolby TrueHD mode.
This sets whether to
output as specified in
“Dynamic Compression”
or output directly without
compressing the dynamic
range of audio recorded in
the disc.
On : Outputs using the settings made in “Dynamic Compression”.
Off : “Dynamic Compression” settings and “Dialogue normalization”
(vpage133) are disabled, and the signals on the disk are output as is.
Dynamic Compression
Compress dynamic range
(difference between loud
and soft sounds).
Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to
source.
Low / Medium / High : These set the compression level.
Off : Dynamic range compression always off.
You can set “Auto” only for the Dolby TrueHD source.
Low Frequency Effects
Adjust the low-frequency
effects level (LFE).
–10dB – 0dB
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting
to the values below.
•Dolby Digital sources : “0dB”
•DTS movie sources : “0dB”
•DTS music sources : “–10dB”
Audio
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
106
Setting items Setting details
Set Defaults
The “Surround Parameter”
settings are returned to the
default settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Set Defaults” and press
ENTER, the “Reset to the default values?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Audio
Setting items Setting details
Delay Time
Adjust the audio delay time
against video to extend the
sound field image. You can
set this when the sound
mode is “MATRIX”.
0ms – 300ms (30ms)
Effect Level
Adjust the sound effect
level. You can set this when
the sound mode is original
listening mode.
1 – 15 (10)
Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the
surround signals seems unnatural.
Room Size
Determine size of acoustic
environment. You can set
this when the sound mode
is original listening mode.
Small : Simulate acoustics of a small room.
Medium small : Simulate acoustics of a medium-small room.
Medium : Simulate acoustics of a medium room.
Medium large : Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room.
Large : Simulate acoustics of a large room.
NOTE
“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are
played.
Height Gain
Control the front height
channel volume.
Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.
Normal : Front height channel sound is output with standard sound
volume.
High : Increase the front height channel volume.
NOTE
“Height Gain” is displayed for the following settings.
•When “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Front Height”.
•When the “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” setting (vpage123) is
set other than to “None”.
•When sound mode is “PLgz” or the PLgz decoder is used.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
107
Subwoofer Level
Default settings are underlined.
Sets the subwoofer on/off and its output level.
Setting items Setting details
Subwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on
and off.
On : The subwoofer is used.
Off : The subwoofer is not used.
NOTE
This can be set when the sound mode is “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”
(vpage71) and the “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage123) is
“LFE+Main”.
Subwoofer Level
Set the subwoofer output
level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
Restorer
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the
amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “Restorer”
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those
of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer
sound with compressed audio signals.
Setting items Setting details
Mode
Set the mode for
“Restorer”.
Off : Do not use “Restorer”.
Mode 1 (High) : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak
highs (64 kbps and under).
Mode 2 (Middle) : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed
sources (96 kbps and under).
Mode 3 (Low) : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal
highs (96 kbps and over).
•This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
•“Restorer” settings are stored for each input source.
•This item default setting for “NETWORK” and “iPod/USB” is “Mode 3
(Low)”. All others are set to “Off”.
•This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
Audio
Tone
Default settings are underlined.
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Setting items Setting details
Tone Control
Set the tone control function
to “On” and “Off”.
On : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
Off : Playback without tone adjustment.
“Tone Control” can be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage109) is set
to “Off”.
NOTE
•“Tone Control” settings are not reflected to ZONE2.
•The tone cannot be adjusted in the “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT” mode.
Bass
Adjust bass.
–6dB – +6dB (0dB)
“Bass” can be set when the menu “Tone Control” setting is “On”.
Treble
Adjust treble.
–6dB – +6dB (0dB)
“Treble” can be set when the menu “Tone Control” setting is “On”.
Dialogue Level
Default settings are underlined.
Sets the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center channel.
Setting items Setting details
Dialogue
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
108
Audio
Audio Delay
Default settings are underlined.
While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output.
Setting details
0ms – 200ms
•This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync” (vpage112) is set to
“On” and when a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is connected.
•Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.
•Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage 113) is set to “Auto” or
“Game”.
Volume
Default settings are underlined.
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
Setting items Setting details
Scale
Set how volume is
displayed.
0 – 98 : Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
–79.5dB – 18.0dB : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.
•The “Scale” setting is applied also to the “Limit” and “Power On Level”
display method.
•The “Scale” setting applies to all zones.
Limit
Make a setting for
maximum volume.
Off : Do not set a maximum volume.
60 (–20dB) / 70 (–10dB) / 80 (0dB)
Power On Level
Define the volume setting
that is active when the
power is turned on.
Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79dB – 18dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
Mute Level
Set the amount of
attenuation when muting
is on.
Full : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Audyssey
Default settings are underlined.
Set Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
. These can be
selected after Audyssey
®
Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology,
please see page151.
NOTE
•If you have not performed Audyssey
®
Setup, or if you change the speaker settings after performing
Audyssey
®
Setup, you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume.
In this case, either perform Audyssey
®
Setup over again or perform “Restore...” (vpage 32) to
return to the settings after Audyssey
®
Setup was run.
•When HD Audio for which the sampling frequency exceeds 96 kHz is played back, the “Audyssey”
cannot be set.
Setting items Setting details
MultEQ
®
XT
MultEQ
®
XT compensates
for both time and
frequency characteristics
of the listening area based
on Audyssey
®
Setup
measurement results.
Selection is done from three
types of compensation
curves. We recommend the
“Audyssey” setting.
MultEQ
®
XT is the
prerequisite function for
Dynamic EQ and Dynamic
Volume.
Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.
Audyssey Byp. L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except
front L and R speakers.
Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat
response.
Graphic EQ : Apply frequency response set with “Graphic EQ”
(vpage110).
Off : Turn “MultEQ
®
XT” equalizer off.
•“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be
selected after Audyssey
®
Setup has been performed. “Audyssey”
is automatically selected after performing Audyssey
®
Setup. When
“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected,
illuminates.
•After running Audyssey
®
Setup, if the Speaker Configuration, Distance,
Channel Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed without
increasing the number of speakers measured, only illuminates.
NOTE
When using headphones, “MultEQ
®
XT” is automatically set to “Off”.
“MultEQ
®
XT”, “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings are stored for each input source.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
109
Audio
Setting items Setting details
Dynamic EQ
Solve the problem of
deteriorating sound quality
as volume is decreased
by taking into account
human perception and
room acoustics. Works with
MultEQ
®
XT.
On : Use Dynamic EQ.
Off : Do not use Dynamic EQ.
is displayed when set to “On”.
NOTE
When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do
“Tone Control” (vpage107) adjustment.
Reference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
is
referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes
adjustments to maintain
the reference response
and surround envelopment
when the volume is turned
down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not
always used in music or
other non-film content.
Dynamic EQ Reference
Level Offset provides three
offsets from the film level
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB) that can be selected
when the mix level of the
content is not within the
standard. Recommended
setting levels are shown at
right.
0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when
listening to movies.
5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range,
such as classical music.
10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material
that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
range.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On” (vpage109).
Dynamic Volume
Solve the problem of large
variations in volume level
between TV, movies and
other content (between
quiet passages and
loud passages, etc.) by
automatically adjusting to
the user’s preferred volume
setting.
Heavy : Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.
Medium : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.
Light : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.
Off : Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.
• is displayed when set to “Heavy”, “Medium” or “Light”.
•If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey
®
Setup”
(vpage30), the setting is automatically changed to “Medium”.
Setting items Setting details
Audyssey DSX
®
Provides more immersive
surround sound by adding
the front height or front
wide channels.
On : Turn on Audyssey DSX
®
processing for height or wide expansion.
Off : Do not set Audyssey DSX
®
.
NOTE
“Audyssey DSX
®
” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being
played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the
respective channels are played back using the input signals.
Stage Height
Adjust sound stage height
when using front height
speakers.
–10 – +10 (0)
•“Audyssey DSX
®
” can be set when you are using front height speakers
or front wide speakers.
•“Audyssey DSX
®
” is only valid when using a center speaker.
•“Audyssey DSX
®
” is valid when surround mode is DOLBY listening
mode or DTS listening mode other than PLgz Height.
About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX
®
is a scalable system that adds new speakers to
improve surround impression.
Starting with a 5.1 system Audyssey DSX
®
first adds Wide channels
for the biggest impact on envelopment. Research in human hearing has
proven that information from the Wide channels is much more critical
in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than the Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1 systems. Audyssey DSX
®
then
creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the next most important
acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition to these new Wide and
Height channels, Audyssey DSX
®
applies Surround Envelopment
Processing to enhance the blend between the front and surround
channels.
Stage Width
Adjust sound stage width
when using front wide
speakers.
–10 – +10 (0)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
110
Audio
Graphic EQ
Default settings are underlined.
Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
“Graphic EQ” can be set when “MultEQ
®
XT” setting (vpage108) is “Graphic EQ”.
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Selection
Select whether to adjust
tones for individual speakers
or for all speakers.
All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together.
Left/Right : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together.
Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker.
Adjust EQ
Adjust tones for each
frequency band. Adjust
the speaker selected in
“Speaker Selection”.
q Select the speaker.
w Select the adjustment frequency band.
63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz
•Select the speakers you want to adjust when “Left/Right” or “Each”
is selected.
e Adjust the level.
–20.0dB – +6.0dB (0.0dB)
Curve Copy
Copy “Audyssey Flat”
(vpage108) curve from
MultEQ
®
XT.
Yes : Copy.
No : Do not copy.
•“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey
®
Setup has been performed.
•When you select “Curve Copy” and press ENTER, the “Copy “Audyssey
Flat”?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press
ENTER.
Set Defaults
The “Graphic EQ” settings
are returned to the default
settings.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Set Defaults” and press
ENTER, the “Reset to the default values?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
111
Video
Make video-related settings.
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press o or BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “Video” procedure
Picture Adjust (vpage112)
HDMI Setup (vpage112)
Output Settings (vpage113)
Volume Display (vpage114)
Info Display (vpage115)
Audio Display (vpage115)
TV Format (vpage115)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
112
Video
Picture Adjust
Default settings are underlined.
Picture quality can be adjusted.
We recommend leaving the settings unchanged from the default settings. First adjust the display image
quality on your TV, and use this menu only when you want to make fine adjustments.
•This item can be set when the input source is
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
NETWORK
TV AUDIO
.
•With input sources other than the ones above, this item can be set when “Video Source” is selected. In
this case, the original input source settings are called out.
•Can be set when the “Video Conversion” setting (vpage113) is “On”.
•“Blu-ray”, “GAME”, “CD” or “TV AUDIO” can be set when “HDMI” or “COMP” (vpage117) has
been assigned.
Setting items Setting details
Contrast
Adjust picture contrast.
–6 – +6 (0)
Brightness
Adjust picture brightness.
0 – +12
Saturation
Adjust picture chroma level
(saturation).
–6 – +6 (0)
Hue
Adjust green and red
balance.
–6 – +6 (0)
Noise Reduction
Reduce overall picture
noise.
Off / Low / Medium / High
Enhancer
Emphasize picture contours.
0 – +12
•“Picture Adjust” can not be set when component video and video signals are output.
•“Picture Adjust” can not be set when 4K signals are input.
HDMI Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
Setting items Setting details
Auto Lip Sync
Make automatic
compensation for timing
shift in audio and video
output.
On : Compensated.
Off : Not compensated.
HDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output
device.
AVR : Play back through speakers connected to the unit.
TV : Play back through TV connected to the unit.
•The audio signal input from the HDMI input connector can be output as
an output signal from the HDMI output connector by setting the HDMI
audio output destination to TV.
Audio signals input via the Analog/Coaxial/Optical input connectors
cannot be output from the HDMI output connector.
•When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV
audio setting (vpage91 “HDMI control function”).
Video Output
Make settings for HDMI
monitor output.
Auto (Dual) : The presence of a TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
1 or HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is detected automatically, and that TV
connection is used.
Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector is always
used. Video is not output from the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
2 connector.
Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is always
used. Video is not output from the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
1 connector.
•If both the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors are
connected and “Resolution” (vpage114) is set to “Auto”, the signals
are output with a resolution compatible with both TV.
•With “Resolution” (vpage 114) not set to “Auto”, check whether
the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “Video” –
“Monitor 1” and “Monitor 2” (vpage133).
NOTE
Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not
be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either
“Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
113
Video
Setting items Setting details
HDMI Control
You can link operations with
devices connected to HDMI
and compatible with HDMI
Control.
On : Use HDMI control function.
Off : Do not use HDMI control function.
•When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is
connected, set “HDMI Control” to “Off”.
•Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to
check the settings.
•Refer to “HDMI control function” (vpage 91) for more information
about the HDMI control function.
NOTE
•When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more standby
power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
•The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible
with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are
connected when you perform HDMI control.
•If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the
power to connected devices after the change.
Standby Source
Sets the HDMI input source
to put into standby when
the power is on.
Last : Enters standby with the previously used input source.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / GAME / AUX / MEDIA PLAYER / CD : Enters
standby with each of the input sources assigned to each input terminal.
“Standby Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Control Monitor
Set the HDMI MONITOR
terminal to output the HDMI
control signal.
Monitor 1 : Output from the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.
Monitor 2 : Output from the HDMI MONITOR 2 connector.
•“Control Monitor” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
•ARC function works only with the terminal selected by “Control
Monitor”.
Power Off Control
Links the power standby of
this unit to external devices.
All : If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input
source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video : If power to a connected TV is turned off when the input source
is Blu-ray / DVD / TV AUDIO / CBL/SAT / GAME / MEDIA PLAYER / AUX,
power to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Off : This unit does not link with power to a TV.
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Output Settings
Default settings are underlined.
Makes screen-related settings.
z “Blu-ray”, “GAME”, “CD” or “TV AUDIO” can be set when “HDMI” or “COMP” (vpage117) has
been assigned.
“Output Settings” can not be set when 4K signals are input.
Setting items Setting details
Video Mode
Make settings for video
processing.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
z
GAME
z
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
z
TV AUDIO
z
Auto : Process video automatically based on the HDMI content
information.
Game : Always process video for game content.
Movie : Always process video for movie content.
•If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the
input contents.
•If a source is played in both MAIN ZONE (audio and video) and ZONE2
(audio only) modes in the same room, audio in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2
modes may sound out of synchronization, but this is not malfunction. In
this case, setting to “Game” mode may improve audio synchronization.
Video Conversion
The input video signal is
converted automatically
in conjunction with
the connected TV
(vpage6 “Converting
input video signals for
output (Video conversion
function)”).
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
z
GAME
z
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
z
TV AUDIO
z
On : The input video signal is converted.
Off : The input video signal is not converted.
•When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other
source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this
case set “Video Conversion” to “Off”.
•When “Video Conversion” is set to “Off”, the video conversion function
does not work. In this case, connect this unit and TV with the same type
of cable.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
114
Video
Setting items Setting details
i/p Scaler
Convert the input source
resolution to the resolution
set.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
z
GAME
z
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
z
NETWORK
TV AUDIO
z
Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal.
Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.
HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signal.
Off : Do not use i/p scaler function.
•“Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input
connector is assigned.
•Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each
input connector.
•This function is not effective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D,
sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer
resolution.
Resolution
Set the output resolution.
You can set “Resolution”
separately for HDMI output
of the analog video input
and HDMI input.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
z
GAME
z
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
z
NETWORK
TV AUDIO
z
Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
OUT connector supports is detected automatically and the appropriate
output resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz / 4K : Set the output
resolution.
•This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“Off”.
•When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the
analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.
•To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video
signals.
•When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film
sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend
setting the resolution to “1080p”.
•It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output
at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Progressive Mode
Set an appropriate
progressive conversion
mode for the source video
signal.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
z
GAME
z
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
z
TV AUDIO
z
Auto : The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate
mode is set.
Video : Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film
material playback.
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“Off”.
Setting items Setting details
Aspect Ratio
Set the aspect ratio for the
video signals output to the
HDMI.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
z
GAME
z
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
z
NETWORK
TV AUDIO
z
16:9 : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio.
“Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other
than “Off”.
z “Blu-ray”, “GAME”, “CD” or “TV AUDIO” can be set when “HDMI” or “COMP” (vpage117) has
been assigned.
Volume Display
Default settings are underlined.
Sets where to display the master volume level.
Setting items Setting details
Volume
Bottom : Display at the bottom.
Top : Display at the top.
Off : Turn display off.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed
on movie subtitles, set to “Top”.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
115
Video
Info Display
Default settings are underlined.
Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is changed, or input source is switched.
You can set whether or not to show each of these status displays.
Setting items Setting details
On-screen Info
On : Turn display on.
Off : Turn display off.
Audio Display
Default settings are underlined.
Sets how long each menu is displayed when the input source is “NETWORK”, “iPod/USB”, or “FM”.
Setting items Setting details
Audio
Always : Show display continuously.
30s : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.
10s : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.
Off : Turn display off.
TV Format
Default settings are underlined.
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
Setting items Setting details
Format
NTSC : Select NTSC output.
PAL : Select PAL output.
“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu
screen is not displayed.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE2/REC SOURCE and STATUS for at
least 3 seconds.
“V.Format : <PAL>” appears on the display.
2. Use the main unit’s
TUNER PRESET CH +, – and set the video signal
format.
3. Press the main unit’s STATUS to complete the setting.
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the
picture will not be displayed properly.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
116
Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
•You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press o or BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Important information
n About the display of input sources
In this section, the configurable input sources for each item are shown as follows.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
iPod/USB
CD
FM
NETWORK
TV AUDIO
NOTE
Input sources that have been set to “Hide” at “Hide Sources” (vpage119) cannot be selected.
Items that can be set with the “Inputs” procedure
Input Assign (vpage117)
Source Rename (vpage118)
Hide Sources (vpage119)
Source Level (vpage119)
Input Select (vpage119)
Video Source (vpage120)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
117
Setting items Setting details
HDMI
Set this to change the HDMI
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
TV AUDIO
HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6 : Assign an HDMI
input connector to the selected input source.
None : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input
source.
•At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source CBL/SAT DVD Blu-ray GAME
Default
setting
HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4
Input source AUX
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD TV AUDIO
Default
setting
HDMI 6 HDMI 5 None None
•An input source to which an HDMI input connector cannot be assigned
is displayed as “– – –”.
•To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign” – “DIGITAL”, select “Digital” at “Input
Mode” (vpage119).
•The audio signals input from the analog and digital connectors are not
output to the monitor.
•When “HDMI Control” (vpage 113) is set to “On”, HDMI input
connector cannot be assigned to “TV AUDIO”.
Inputs
Input Assign
This unit has certain input sources such as “CBL/SAT” assigned to audio and video connectors by default.
By making the default connections, you can simply press an input source select button to play back audio
or video from the connected device with ease.
When making connections other than the default settings, you must change settings in this section.
Examples of “Input Assign” menu screen displays
This screen appears when the “Inputs” – “each input source” – “Input Assign” menu is selected. Use
the “Input Assign” menu to change the w HDMI input connectors, e Digital input connectors, and r
component input connectors that are assigned to the q input sources in default settings.
DIGITALHDMI COMP
Inputs/Input Assign [1/2]
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
MEDIA PLAYER
TV AUDIO
AUX
COAX1
COAX2
None
None
None
OPT1
None
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
HDMI5
None
HDMI6
COMP1
COMP2
None
None
None
None
None
Changes HDMI input assignments
w e r
q
Input assignments menu operations
1
Use uio p to move the cursor to the item you want to set, and
then press ENTER.
2
Use o p to select the input connector to be assigned.
3
Press ENTER to register the setting.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
118
Setting items Setting details
DIGITAL
Set this to change the digital
input connectors assigned
to the input sources.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
TV AUDIO
COAX (COAXIAL) 1 / COAX (COAXIAL) 2 / OPT (OPTICAL) 1 /
OPT (OPTICAL) 2 : Assign a digital input connector to the selected input
source.
None : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.
•At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source CBL/SAT DVD Blu-ray GAME
Default
setting
COAX 1 COAX 2 None None
Input source AUX
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD TV AUDIO
Default
setting
None None OPT 2 OPT 1
COMP
(Component video)
Set this to change the
component video input
connectors assigned to the
input sources.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
TV AUDIO
COMP (COMPONENT VIDEO) 1 / COMP (COMPONENT VIDEO) 2
: Assign the component video input connector to the selected input
source.
None : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected
input source.
•At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as
shown below.
Input source CBL/SAT DVD Blu-ray GAME
Default
setting
COMP 1 COMP 2 None None
Input source AUX
MEDIA
PLAYER
CD TV AUDIO
Default
setting
None None None None
An input source to which an component video input connector cannot
be assigned is displayed as “– – –”.
Inputs
Setting items Setting details
Set Defaults
The input source name
is returned to the default
setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
If you select “Set Defaults” and press ENTER,
the message “Reset to the default values?”
is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then
press ENTER.
Source Rename
Change the display name of the selected input source.
This is convenient when the input source name of your device and the input source name of this unit are
different. You can change the name to suit your needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is
displayed on this unit’s display and on the menu screen.
Setting details
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / GAME / AUX / MEDIA PLAYER / CD / TV AUDIO : Change the display name
of the selected input source.
•Up to 12 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page103.
Set Defaults : The input source name is returned to the default setting.
•Yes : Reset to the defaults.
•No : Do not reset to the defaults.
If you select “Set Defaults” and press ENTER, the message “Reset to the
default values?” is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
119
Inputs
Hide Sources
Default settings are underlined.
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Setting details
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / GAME / AUX / MEDIA PLAYER / iPod/USB / CD / FM / NETWORK / TV
AUDIO : Select input source that is not used.
•Show : Use this source.
•Hide : Do not use this source.
NOTE
•Input sources being used in the MAIN ZONE or ZONE2 cannot be selected.
•Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.
•Input sources set to “Hide” cannot be selected using the input source select button.
Source Level
Default settings are underlined.
•This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
•Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.
Setting details
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for
which “DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage117).
Input Select
Default settings are underlined.
Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.
Setting items Setting details
Input Mode
Set the audio input modes
for the different input
sources.
It is normally recommended
to set the audio input mode
to “Auto”.
Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.
HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital : Play only signals from digital input.
Analog : Play only signals from analog input.
•“Digital” can be set for input sources for which “DIGITAL” is assigned
at “Input Assign” (vpage118).
•If the input source is set to “CBL/SAT”, “DVD”, “Blu-ray”, “MEDIA
PLAYER”, “AUX” or “CD”, it can be set to “Analog”.
•When digital signals are properly input, the indicator lights on
the display. If the indicator does not light, check “Input Assign”
(vpage118) and the connections.
•If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR connectors, the input mode whose
input source is “TV AUDIO” is fixed to ARC.
Decode Mode
Set the audio decode mode
for input source.
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
GAME
AUX
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
TV AUDIO
Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically.
PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.
•This item can be set for input sources for which “DIGITAL” is assigned
at “Input Assign” (vpage117).
•Normally set this mode to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when
inputting the corresponding input signal.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
120
Inputs
Video Source
Default settings are underlined.
Video of another input source is played back combined with the playing audio.
Setting details
Default : Play the picture and sound of the input source.
Blu-ray / DVD / TV AUDIO / CBL/SAT / GAME / MEDIA PLAYER / AUX / CD : Select video input source
to view. The video of the selected input source is played along with the audio currently being played. This
can be set for individual input sources.
“Blu-ray”, “GAME”, “CD” or “TV AUDIO” can be selected only when “COMP” is assigned to the
input source.
NOTE
•It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
•Input sources for which “Hide” is selected at “Hide Sources” (vpage119) cannot be selected.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
121
Speakers
Set when changing Audyssey
®
Setup settings.
•If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey
®
Setup, it will not be possible to set
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
(vpage108).
•Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press o or BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “Speakers” procedure
Audyssey
®
Setup (vpage26, 89)
Manual Setup (vpage122)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
122
Manual Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey
®
Setup.
•If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey
®
Setup, it will not be possible to select
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
(vpage108).
•“Manual Setup” can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.
Setting items Setting details
Amp Assign
Select power amplifier
usage method to match
your speaker system.
Assign Mode : Set the assignment mode.
•Surround Back : Setting for 7.1-channel playback using surround back
speakers.
•ZONE2 : Setting to assign the unit’s built-in power amplifier for ZONE2
and output the audio in stereo.
•Bi-AMP : Setting to use the front speakers via the bi-amp connection.
•Front B : Setting to use the second set of front speakers for playback.
You can switch the front speakers A and B to be used for playback in
accordance with the 2-channel playback or multi-channel playback mode.
When you select this Front B setting, also perform the “Front Speaker
Setup” (vpage125) procedure.
•Front Height : Setting for 7.1-channel playback using front height
speakers.
•Front Wide : Setting for 7.1-channel playback using front wide speakers.
Speaker Config.
Indicate speaker presence
and select speaker size
categories based on bass
reproduction capability.
NOTE
Do not use the outward
shape of the speaker to
determine selection of a
“Large” or “Small” speaker.
Instead, use the frequencies
set in “Crossovers”
(vpage125) as the
standard for determining
bass reproduction capability.
Front : Set the front speaker size.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
•When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “Surr. Back”,
“Front Height” and “Front Wide” can not be set to “Large”.
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.
“Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”.
Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.
•Yes : Use a subwoofer.
•No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to
“Yes”.
Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.
•When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “Surr. Back”, “Front Height” and
“Front Wide” can be set to “Large”.
•When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr. Back”, “Front Height” and
“Front Wide” are automatically set to “None”.
Speakers
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
123
Setting items Setting details
Bass
Set subwoofer and LFE
signal range playback.
Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by
subwoofer.
•LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is
added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
•LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
•“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”
(vpage122) is set to “Yes”.
•Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest
bass.
•Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced
from the subwoofer.
NOTE
If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the
subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode.
LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to
change the playback frequency of the subwoofer.
•80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz
Speakers
Setting items Setting details
Speaker Config.
(Continued)
Surr. Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.
•2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers.
•1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this
setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel.
NOTE
When “Assign Mode” setting (vpage 122) is “Surround Back”, you
can make the “Surr. Back” setting.
Front Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Assign Mode” setting (vpage122) is “Front Height”, you can
make the “Front Height” setting.
Front Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
•Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low
frequencies.
•Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for
low frequencies.
•None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.
NOTE
When “Assign Mode” setting (vpage 122) is “Front Wide”, you can
make the “Front Wide” setting.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
124
Speakers
Setting items Setting details
Distances
Set distance from listening
position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the
distance from the listening
position to each speaker.
Unit : Set the unit of distance.
•Meters / Feet
Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
•0.1m / 0.01m
•1ft / 0.1ft
Set Defaults : The “Distances” settings are returned to the default
settings.
•Yes : Reset to the defaults.
•No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Set Defaults” and press
ENTER, the “Reset to the default values?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Center / Subwoofer /
Surround L / Surround R / Surr. Back L
z
/ Surr. Back R
z
/ Front Wide L /
Front Wide R : Select speaker for distance setting.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” setting (vpage123) is
set to “1spkr”, “Surr. Back” is displayed.
•0.00m18.00m / 0.0ft60.0ft : Set the distance.
•The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign”
(vpage122) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage122) settings.
•Default settings :
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Center / Subwoofer / Front
Wide L / Front Wide R : 3.60 m (12.0 ft)
Surround L / Surround R / Surr. Back L / Surr. Back R : 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
•Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than
6.00 m (20.0 ft).
NOTE
Speakers set to “None” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage 122) are not
displayed.
Setting items Setting details
Levels
Set the volume of the test
tone to be the same when it
is output from each speaker.
Test Tone Start : Output test tone.
•Front L / F. Height L / Center / F. Height R / Front R / Front Wide R /
Surround R / Surr. Back R
z
/ Surr. Back L
z
/ Surround L /
Front Wide L / Subwoofer : Select speaker to output test tone.
z When the “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” setting (vpage123) is
set to “1spkr”, “Surr. Back” is displayed.
•–12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the volume.
When “Levels” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the sound
modes.
NOTE
•Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Config.” (vpage 122)
settings are not displayed.
•When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES jack of this unit, the
“Levels” is not displayed.
Set Defaults : The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.
•Yes : Reset to the defaults.
•No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Set Defaults” and press
ENTER, the “Reset to the default values?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
125
Speakers
Setting items Setting details
Crossovers
Set the maximum frequency
of the bass signal output
from each channel to
the subwoofer. Set the
Crossover Frequency to
suit the bass reproduction
capability of the speaker
being used.
Crossover : Set the crossover frequency.
•40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz / Individual : Set the crossover frequency for all speakers. See the
speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
The following settings can be set when the “Crossover” setting is set to
“Individual”.
•Front / Center / Surround / Surr. Back / Front Height / Front Wide :
Select speaker for setting of crossover frequency.
•40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /
250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.
•“Crossovers” can be set when the “Bass” – “Subwoofer Mode”
(vpage123) setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you have a speaker that
is set to “Small”.
•Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small
speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to
a higher frequency.
•For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency
is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
•The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ
depending on to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage123).
•When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.”
can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
•If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the
speaker size.
Front Speaker Setup
Set the front speakers to
use for every sound mode.
NOTE
This can be set when
“Assign Mode” is set to
“Front B” (vpage122).
2ch Playback : The front speakers used in direct play (2 channel), stereo
play and pure direct play (2 channel) are set in advance.
•A : Front speaker A is used.
•B : Front speaker B is used.
•A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
Multi ch Playback : The front speakers used in play modes other than
direct play (2 channel), stereo play and pure direct play (2 channel) are set
in advance.
•A : Front speaker A is used.
•B : Front speaker B is used.
•A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
126
Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On” (use the default setting). This
allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
If you assign an IP address for each device, you must use the “IP Address” setting to assign an IP
address to this unit and enter the information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway
address and subnet mask.
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press o or BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “Network” procedure
Information (vpage127)
IP Control (vpage127)
Friendly Name (vpage127)
Settings (vpage128)
Last.fm Display (vpage129)
Maintenance Mode (vpage129)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
127
Information
Display network information.
Setting details
Friendly Name / DHCP=On or Off / IP Address / MAC Address
MAC Address is required to make a vTuner account.
IP Control
Default settings are underlined.
Set the network function on/off during standby.
Setting details
Off In Standby : Suspend network function during standby.
Always On : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.
Set to “Always On” when using the web control function.
NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, it consumes more standby power.
Network
Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name
according to your preferences.
Setting items Setting details
Edit Name
Edit Friendly Name.
•The default Friendly Name on first use is “DENON AVR-2313”.
•Up to 63 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page103.
Set Defaults
Restore Friendly Name,
which you had changed, to
the default setting.
Yes : Reset to the defaults.
No : Do not reset to the defaults.
When you select “Set Defaults” and press
ENTER, the “Reset to the default values?”
prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or
“No”, and press ENTER.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
128
Network
Settings
Default settings are underlined.
Make settings for wired LAN.
Only set “Settings” when connecting to a network without a DHCP function.
Setting details
Network
Information
IP Control
Friendly Name
Settings
Maintenance Mode
Selects how configure the network settings
q
Network/Settings
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Proxy
Configure the network settings manually
Off
192.168.000.001
255.255.255.000
255.255.255.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
e
y
t
w
r
q On the menu, select “Network” – “Settings” and press ENTER.
w Use ui to select “DHCP”, then press ENTER.
e Use o p to select “Off”, then press ENTER.
r Use ui to select “IP Address”, then press ENTER.
•IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 – 10.255.255.254
CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 – 172.31.255.254
CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 – 192.168.255.254
t Use uio p to input the address and press ENTER.
y Use ui to select setting item, then press ENTER.
•Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter
directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.
•Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP
address.
•Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more DNS are provided by your
provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and “Secondary DNS”.
u Press o or BACK.
The display returns to the original screen.
•When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and press ENTER (vpage129
“Proxy settings”).
Setting details
•If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at “IP
Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “On” in this unit’s default settings.
•If this unit is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings
must be made. In this case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network
administrator.
•If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings (vpage24).
•If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the
store from which you purchased your computer.
•When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press o or BACK.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
129
Network
Setting details
n Proxy settings
Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a proxy server that is on your
internal network or provided by your provider, etc.
Network
Information
IP Control
Friendly Name
Settings
Maintenance Mode
Selects how configure the network settings
q
Network/Settings
DHCP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Proxy
Enter a proxy server address
Off
192.168.000.001
255.255.255.000
255.255.255.000
000.000.000.000
000.000.000.000
w
Network/Settings
Proxy
Proxy
Address
Port
Proxy server is used
On
Address
00000
000.000.000.000
i
r
u
y
t
q On the menu, select “Network” – “Settings” and press ENTER.
w Use ui to select “Proxy” and press ENTER.
e Press ENTER again.
r Use o p to select “On” and press ENTER.
t Press i to select “Proxy”, then press ENTER.
y Use o p to select “Address” or “Name”, and then press ENTER.
Address : Select when inputting by address.
Name : Select when inputting by domain name.
u Press i to select “Address” or “Name”, then press ENTER.
When “Address” is selected in step y : Use uio p to enter the proxy
server address, and press ENTER.
When “Name” is selected in step y : Use the software keyboard
(vpage103) to enter the domain name, and select
O K
.
•For character input, see page103.
i Press i to select “Port”, then press ENTER. Use uio p to input the proxy
server port number and press ENTER.
Setup is complete.
o Press o or BACK.
The display returns to the original screen.
Last.fm Display
Default settings are underlined.
Set whether or not to display Last.fm item on the menu.
Setting details
Show : Display Last.fm item on the menu.
Hide : Do not display Last.fm item on the menu.
Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a DENON service engineer or custom installer.
Setting details
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
130
General
Make various other settings.
Menu operation
1
Press MAIN to switch the zone mode to the MAIN ZONE.
MAIN lights.
2
Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3
Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.
4
Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.
•To return to the previous item, press o or BACK.
•Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed.
The menu display disappears.
Items that can be set with the “General” procedure
Language (vpage131)
ZONE2 Setup (vpage131)
Zone Rename (vpage131)
Quick Select Names (vpage132)
Trigger Out (vpage132)
Auto Standby (vpage132)
Front Display (vpage132)
Information (vpage133)
Firmware (vpage134)
Setup Lock (vpage135)
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
131
General
Language
Default settings are underlined.
Set the language for display on the menu screen.
Setting details
English / Deutsch / Français / Italiano / Español / Nederlands / Svenska
“Language” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed.
Following the display content to make the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE2/REC SOURCE and STATUS for at least 3 seconds.
“V.Format : <PAL>” appears on the display.
2. Press the main unit’s DIMMER and set “Lang. : <ENGLISH>”.
3. Use the main unit’s TUNER PRESET CH +, – and set the language.
4. Press the main unit’s STATUS to complete the setting.
ZONE2 Setup
Default settings are underlined.
Set the audio to play back with ZONE2.
•“ZONE2 Setup” is displayed when “ZONE2” is selected with “Assign Mode” (vpage122).
Setting items Setting details
Bass
Adjust bass tones.
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
Treble
Adjust treble tones.
–10dB – +10dB (0dB)
High Pass Filter
Make settings for cutting
the low range to reduce
distortion in the bass.
On : The low range is attenuated.
Off : The low range is not attenuated.
Lch Level
Adjust the left channel
output level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
Rch Level
Adjust the right channel
output level.
–12dB – +12dB (0dB)
Channel
Set the signal output from
multi-zone.
Stereo : Select stereo output.
Mono : Select monaural output.
Setting items Setting details
Volume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and remote control
unit.
40 (–40dB) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
80 (0dB) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external
amplifier.
When “Assign Mode” (vpage 122) is set to “ZONE2”, the
“Volume Level” setting is automatically set to “Variable”.
Volume Limit
Make a setting for
maximum volume.
Off : Do not set a maximum volume.
60 (–20dB) / 70 (–10dB) / 80 (0dB)
This is displayed from –79 dB to 18 dB when “Scale” (vpage108)
is set to “–79.5dB – 18.0dB”.
Power On Volume
Define the volume setting
that is active when the
power is turned on.
Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.
Mute : Always mute when power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79dB – 18dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
This is displayed from –79 dB to 18 dB when “Scale” (vpage108)
is set to “–79.5dB – 18.0dB”.
Mute Level
Set the amount of
attenuation when muting
is on.
Full : The sound is muted entirely.
–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
Setting details
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2
•Up to 10 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page103.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
132
Quick Select Names
Change the “Quick Select” display title to one you prefer.
Setting details
Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4
•Up to 16 characters can be input.
•For character input, see page103.
Trigger Out
Selects when to activate trigger out.
For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jack, see “TRIGGER OUT jack” (vpage23).
Setting details
n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to “On”.
n When setting for input source
Activate trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.
Active for the zone set to “On” with “When setting for zone”.
n When setting for HDMI monitor
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.
Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected. Active when the “MAIN
ZONE” set to “On” with “When setting for zone” is selected, and when the input source set to
“On” with “When setting for input source” is selected.
•On : Activate trigger on this mode.
•– – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Auto Standby
Default settings are underlined.
When you do not perform any operation on this unit with no audio or video input for a specified time,
this unit automatically enters the standby mode. Before it enters the standby mode, “Auto Standby” is
displayed on the display of this unit and the menu screen.
Setting details
30min : The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
60min : The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
Off : The unit does not go into standby automatically.
Front Display
Default settings are underlined.
Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
Setting items Setting details
Dimmer
Bright : Normal display brightness.
Dim : Reduced display brightness.
Dark : Very low display brightness.
Off : Turns the display off.
Buttons on the main unit can be used for operations.
Each time DIMMER is pressed, the setting is changed as shown
below.
Bright Dim
DarkOff
NOTE
When “Dimmer” is set to “Off”, the display turns off and appears as if
there is no electricity.
General
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
133
Information
Show information about receiver settings, input signals, etc.
Items Setting details
Audio
Show information about
audio input signals.
Sound Mode : The currently set surround mode.
Input Signal : The input signal type.
Format : The number of input signal channels (presence of front, surround,
LFE).
Sample Rate : The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back
channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix
signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.
Dialogue normalization function
This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital
sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
The correction value can be checked using the
STATUS on the main unit.
Offset: - 4dB
The figure is the corrected value. This cannot be changed.
Video
Show information about
HDMI input/output signals
and monitor.
Signal
•Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
Monitor 1 / Monitor 2
•Interface / Resolutions
ZONE
Show information about
current settings.
MAIN ZONE : This item shows information about settings for MAIN
ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.
•ZONE Name / Select Source / Name / Sound Mode / Input Mode /
Decode Mode / HDMI / Digital / Component / Rec Select / Video
Select / Video Mode / Content Type / Video Convert / i/p Scaler /
Resolution / Progressive Mode / Aspect Ratio etc.
ZONE2 : This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.
•ZONE Name / Power / Select Source / Volume Level
“Volume Level” for ZONE2 is displayed when “Assign Mode”
(vpage122) is set to “ZONE2”.
Firmware Version : Displays information for the current firmware.
Press INFO to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other information at the
bottom of the screen.
Examples of screen display
•Status display screen
When the input source is switched. When the volume is adjusted.
SOURCE
VIDEOAUTO DTS
SOUND
DVD
CBL/SAT
DTS SURROUND
50.0
Status display: The operating status appears briefly on the screen when the input
source is switched or the volume is changed.
NOTE
The status display screen cannot be displayed at a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or while certain 3D
video contents is being played.
General
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
134
General
Firmware
Default settings are underlined.
Set whether or not to check for firmware update, update the firmware, and display update and upgrade
notifications.
Setting items Setting details
Update
Update the firmware of the
receiver.
NOTE
In cases where it is not
possible to connect to
the network after doing a
firmware update, connect
to the network again using
“Network” (vpage126).
Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check
approximately how long it will take to complete an update.
Update Start : Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is
displayed.
When updating is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
•If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not
possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment,
then update again.
Display Description
Updating fail Updating failed.
Login failed Failure to log into server.
Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.
Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.
Setting items Setting details
Notifications
Displays a notification
message on this unit’s
menu screen when the
latest firmware is released
with “Update”.
Display a notification
message on this unit’s
menu screen when
downloadable firmware is
released with “Add New
Feature”.
Update : The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when
the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24)
when using this function.
•On : Display update message.
•Off : Do not display update message.
•When you press ENTER during display of the
notification message, the “Check for Update”
screen is displayed (Refer to page 134 for
more information on “Update”).
•Press o or BACK to erase the notification
message.
Upgrade : The notification message is displayed for about 20
seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet
(vpage24) when using this function.
•On : Display upgrade message.
•Off : Do not display upgrade message.
•When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the
“Add New Feature” screen is displayed (Refer to page 135 for more
information on “Add New Feature”).
•Press o or BACK to erase the notification message.
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
v See overleaf
DVD
135
General
Setting items Setting details
Add New Feature
Display new features that
can be downloaded to
this unit and perform an
upgrade.
NOTE
In cases where it is not
possible to connect to the
network after adding a
new function, connect to
the network again using
“Network” (vpage126).
Upgrade Package : Display the items to be upgraded.
Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by
the upgrade.
Upgrade start : Execute the upgrade process.
When the upgrade starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu
screen is shut down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade time
which has elapsed is displayed.
When upgrading is complete, the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
•If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and network
environment and then perform the upgrade again.
See the DENON website for details about upgrades.
When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this
menu and upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been
carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out
the procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main
unit’s TUNER PRESET CH – and STATUS for at least 3 seconds.
Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”
•In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a
broadband Internet connection (vpage24).
•Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
•Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/
upgrading procedure to be completed.
•Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/
upgrading is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the
parameters, etc., set on this unit.
•If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or
remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update retry” appears on the display and update restarts from
the point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the network environment.
•Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on the DENON
web site each time related plans are defined.
•When usable new firmware is released with “Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification message
is displayed on the menu screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Notifications” – “Update”
(vpage134) and “Notifications” – “Upgrade” (vpage134) to “Off”.
Setup Lock
Default settings are underlined.
Protect settings from inadvertent change.
Setting items Setting details
Lock
On : Turn protection on.
Off : Turn protection off.
When canceling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.
NOTE
When “Lock” is set to “On”, the settings listed below can no longer be
changed. Also, “Setup Locked!” is displayed if you attempt to operate
related settings.
•Setup menu operations
Basic version
Advanced version
Informations
Advanced version
DVD
Informations
136
F Part names and functions vpage137
F Other information vpage142
F Troubleshooting vpage154
F Specifications vpage159
F Index vpage160
Informations
Here, we list various information related to this unit.
Please refer to this information as needed.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
137
Front panel
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Q3 Q8Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
ur t yeq w
Q0
oQ1Q2 i
q Power operation button (X) ··················································· (33)
Turn power to this unit on and off (standby).
w Power indicator ······································································· (33)
GPower indicator statusH
•Power on : Green
•Normal standby : Off
•When “HDMI Control” (vpage113) is set to “On” : Red
•When “IP Control” (vpage127) is set to “Always On” : Red
e Headphones jack (PHONES)
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no
longer be output from the connected speakers.
NOTE
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively
when using headphones.
Q0 Display ···················································································· (138)
Q1 Remote control sensor ························································· (141)
Q2 SOURCE SELECT knob ··················································· (33, 158)
Q3 Tuner preset channel buttons
(TUNER PRESET CH +, –) ························································ (45)
Q4 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ··························································· (98)
Q5 ZONE2 / REC SOURCE button ········································· (94, 98)
Q6 DIMMER button ····································································· (132)
Q7 STATUS button ··················································· (36, 53, 57, 133)
Q8 QUICK SELECT buttons ·························································· (93)
r AUX-HDMI connector ····························································· (10)
t iPod/USB port ········································································· (19)
y AUX INPUT connectors ·························································· (17)
Remove the cap covering the connectors when you want to use
them.
u SETUP MIC jack ································································· (28, 89)
i MASTER VOLUME knob ··················································· (34, 98)
o Master volume indicator
Part names and functions
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
138
Display
t ryuioQ0Q1Q2
q w e
q Information display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
w Input signal indicators
e ZONE2 indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 (separate room) power is turned on
(vpage98).
r MUTE indicator
This lights when the mute mode is selected (vpage34).
t Master volume indicator
y Circle indicator
Circle indicator is displayed when the input source is “NETWORK”
or “iPod/USB” when you are playing back music.
u Sleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage92, 98).
i Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “FM”.
STEREO : In FM mode, this lights up when receiving analog stereo
broadcasts.
TUNED : Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
RDS : Lights up when receiving RDS broadcasts.
o Audyssey
®
indicator
This indicator lights when the “MultEQ
®
XT” (vpage 108),
“Dynamic EQ” (vpage 109), or “Dynamic Volume”
(vpage109) setting is set to “On”.
Q0 Decoder indicators
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby
or DTS decoder is running.
Q1 Surround back indicator
This lights when audio signals are being output from the surround
back speakers (vpage123).
Q2 Input mode indicators
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources
(vpage119).
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
139
Rear panel
See the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
q w r yt
uQ3 i
oQ0Q2 Q1
e
q FM antenna terminal (ANTENNA) ········································· (21)
w Analog audio connectors
(AUDIO) ···························································· (14, 15, 16, 18, 20)
e PRE OUT connectors
·················································· (81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 97)
r Speaker terminals
(SPEAKERS) ··································· (81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88)
t Component video connectors
(COMPONENT VIDEO) ······························ (13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
y AC inlet (AC IN) ········································································ (25)
u HDMI connectors ································································· (9, 10)
i Digital audio connectors
(DIGITAL AUDIO) ································· (13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20)
o Network connector (NETWORK) ··········································· (24)
Q0 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ······················································· (23)
Q1 Video connectors (VIDEO) ···································· (13, 14, 15, 18)
Q2 TRIGGER OUT jack ·································································· (23)
Q3 RS-232C connector ·································································· (23)
NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
140
Remote control unit
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
q
w
e
r
y
t
i
o
Q000
u
Q3
Q4
Q2
Q7
Q1
Q5
Q6
q ZONE SELECT buttons
(MAIN, ZONE2) ····································· (27, 98)
w Input source select buttons ················· (33, 98)
e FAVORITE STATION buttons
(1 – 3) ··························································· (67)
r Channel/page search buttons
(CH/PAGE df)
································· (37,40,51,54,58,62,64)
t MUTE button (:) ······························· (34, 98)
y Information button (INFO) ······················· (133)
u Cursor buttons (uio p)
··················· (102,104,111,116,121,126,130)
i BACK button
··························· (104,111,116,121,126,130)
o System buttons
··················································· (37,40,58,62)
•Skip buttons (8, 9)
•Play/pause button (1/3)
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons
(TUNE +, –) ············································ (41, 42)
Q0 SOUND MODE buttons ······························ (71)
•MOVIE button
•MUSIC button
•GAME button
•PURE button
Q1 Remote control signal transmitter ········· (141)
Q2 SLEEP button ········································ (92, 98)
Q3 POWER button (X) ····································· (33)
Q4 VOLUME buttons (df) ························ (34, 98)
Q5 OPTION button
······································· (35,39,41,53,58,63)
Q6 ENTER button
··················· (102, 104, 111, 116, 121, 126, 130)
Q7 SETUP button
··························· (104, 111, 116, 121, 126, 130)
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
v See overleaf
DVD
141
Remote control unit
Inserting the batteries
q Remove the rear lid in the
direction of the arrow and
remove it.
w Load the two batteries properly
as indicated by the marks in the
battery compartment.
R03/AAA
e Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
•Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit.
•Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate
even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The
supplied batteries are only for verifying operation. Replace them
with new batteries at an early date.)
•When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,
following the q and w marks in the battery compartment.
•To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
•Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
•Do not use two different types of batteries.
•Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
•Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
•Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in
places with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.
•If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
•Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in
use for long periods.
•Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local
regulations regarding battery disposal.
•The remote control unit may function improperly if rechargeable
batteries are used.
Operating range of the remote control unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
30°30°
Approx. 7 m
NOTE
•The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not
operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,
strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or
infrared light.
•When using 3D video devices that transmit radio communication
signals (such as infrared signals etc) between the various units (such
as the monitor, 3D glasses, 3D transmitter unit etc), the remote
control unit may not operate due to interference from those radio
communication signals. If this occurs, adjust the direction and
distance of the 3D communication for each unit, and check that the
remote control unit operation is not affected by these signals.
Specifying the zone used with the remote
control unit
When the ZONE2 button is pressed, only the MAIN ZONE can be
operated with the remote control unit.
Press and hold ZONE2 and SETUP.
MAIN and ZONE2 button brinks.
n To cancel
Press and hold ZONE2 and SETUP.
MAIN and ZONE2 button brinks.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
142
Other information
n Trademark information (vpage142)
n Surround (vpage143)
n Relationship between video signals and monitor
output (vpage149)
n Explanation of terms (vpage151)
Trademark information
This product uses the following technologies (Random order):
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
, Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
and Audyssey DSX
®
are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of
DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface,
and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that
the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless
performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
•Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback
is permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
143
Surround
This unit is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the sound mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Sound modes and surround parameters
This table shows the speakers that can be used in each sound mode and the surround parameters adjustable in each sound mode.
Symbols in the table
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage122).
Sound Mode (vpage71)
Channel output
Surround Parameter (vpage105)
z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround parameters are
the same as in DIRECT mode.
z2 This item cannot be selected during DSD (SA-CD) signal playback.
z3 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.
z4 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage123),
sound is output from the subwoofer.
z5 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as
audio.
z6 Audio is output from the front height speaker when the set sound
mode name contains “+PLgz”. For information on how to check the
sound mode, see page71.
z7 This setting is unavailable when the set sound mode name contains
“+PLgx Music”. For information on how to check the sound mode,
see page71.
z8 This setting is possible when the sound mode is “PLgx Cinema” or
“DTS NEO:6 Cinema”.
z9 This setting is possible when the sound mode is “PLg Cinema” or
“Pro Logic”.
z10 Audio is output from the front height speaker when “Assign Mode”
(vpage122) in the menu is set to ”Front Height” and “Audyssey
DSX
®
” (vpage109) is set to “On”.
z11 Audio is output from the front wide speaker when “Assign Mode”
(vpage 122) in the menu is set to ”Front Wide” and “Audyssey
DSX
®
” (vpage109) is set to “On”.
z12 Audio is output from the surround back speaker when “Assign Mode”
(vpage122) in the menu is set to ”Surround Back”.
z13 Audio is output from the front height speaker when “Assign Mode”
(vpage122) in the menu is set to ”Front Height”.
z14 Audio is output from the front wide speaker when “Assign Mode”
(vpage122) in the menu is set to ”Front Wide”.
Front
L/R
Center
Surround
L/R
Surround back
L/R
Front height
L/R
Front wide
L/R
Subwoofer
Cinema EQ
z2
(vpage105)
Loudness
Management
z3
(vpage105)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2 channel)
z1
S D
z4
S
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
S D D D
z5
D
z5
D
z5
D S
DSD DIRECT (2 channel)
z1
S D
z4
S
DSD DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
S D D D
z5
D
z5
D
z5
D S
STEREO
S D S
MULTI CH IN
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S D D D D S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D S
z8
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D D S
z9
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S D D D S
z9
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S
z9
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S
z9
S
DTS NEO:6
S D D D D S
z8
S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S
z8
S
Audyssey DSX
®
S D D D
z10
D
z11
D S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
DOLBY TrueHD
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
S
DTS SURROUND
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
DTS 96/24
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
DTS-HD
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
DTS Express
S D D D D
z6
D S
z7
MULTI CH STEREO
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
ROCK ARENA
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
JAZZ CLUB
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
MONO MOVIE
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
VIDEO GAME
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
MATRIX
S D D D
z12
D
z13
D
z14
D S
VIRTUAL
S D S
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
v See overleaf
DVD
144
Surround
Sound Mode (vpage71)
Surround Parameter (vpage105)
z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround
parameters are the same as in DIRECT mode.
z15 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is played.
z16 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z17 This setting is available when the set sound mode
name contains “+PLgz”. For information on how to
check the sound mode, see page71.
Dynamic
Compression
z15
(vpage105)
Low Frequency
Effects
z16
(vpage105)
Delay Time
(vpage106)
Effect Level
(vpage106)
Room Size
(vpage106)
Height Gain
z17
(vpage106)
PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only
NEO:6 Music
mode only
Panorama
(vpage105)
Dimension
(vpage105)
Center Width
(vpage105)
Center Image
(vpage105)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2 channel)
z1
S
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
S S
DSD DIRECT (2 channel)
z1
S
DSD DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
S S
STEREO
S S
MULTI CH IN
S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S S S
DTS NEO:6
S S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
S
Audyssey DSX
®
S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S S
DOLBY TrueHD
S S S
DTS SURROUND
S S S
DTS 96/24
S S
DTS-HD
S S
DTS Express
S S
MULTI CH STEREO
S S
ROCK ARENA
S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S
MATRIX
S S S
VIRTUAL
S S
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
v See overleaf
DVD
145
Surround
Sound Mode (vpage71)
Subwoofer
(vpage107)
Tone
z18
(vpage107)
Audyssey (vpage108)
Restorer
z21
(vpage107)
z1 During playback in PURE DIRECT mode, the surround parameters are the
same as in DIRECT mode.
z5 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage 123),
sound is output from the subwoofer.
z18 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 109) is set to
“On”.
z19 This item cannot be set for HD audio exceeding a frequency of 96kHz or
during DSD(SA-CD) signal playback.
z20 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ
®
XT” (vpage 108) is set to
“Off” or “Graphic EQ”.
z21 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1
kHz.
z22 In this sound mode, bass is +6 dB, and treble is +4 dB (Default).
MultEQ
®
XT
z19
(vpage108)
Dynamic EQ
z20
(vpage109)
Dynamic Volume
z20
(vpage109)
Audyssey DSX
®
z19
(vpage109)
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (2 channel)
z1
S
z5
DIRECT/PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
DSD DIRECT (2 channel)
z1
S
z5
DSD DIRECT (Multi-channel)
z1
STEREO
S S S S S
MULTI CH IN
S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX S S S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S S S S S S S
DTS NEO:6
S S S S S S S
DTS NEO:6 A-DSX
S S S S S S S
Audyssey DSX
®
S S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S S S S S S
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S S S S S S
DOLBY TrueHD
S S S S S S
DTS SURROUND
S S S S S S
DTS 96/24
S S S S S S
DTS-HD
S S S S S S
DTS Express
S S S S S S
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
S S
z22
S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S S
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
146
Surround
n Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
This table shows the input signal that can be played in each sound mode. Check the audio signal of the input source then select the sound mode.
Symbols in the table
F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
Sound Mode (vpage71)
NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL Super Audio CD
PCM
(multi ch)
PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
DTS SURROUND
DTS-HD MSTR
z1 F
DTS-HD HI RES
z1 F
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z2z3 F
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z2z3 F
DTS SURROUND
z1 S S F
DTS 96/24
z1 F
DTS (–HD) + PLgx CINEMA z2z4 S S S S S
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC z2z3 S S S S S
DTS (–HD) + PLgz z5z6 S S S S S S S
DTS EXPRESS
z1 F
DTS (–HD) + NEO:6
z2z3 S S S S S
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
z1 S S S S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
z1 S S S S
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA A-DSX
S S S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC A-DSX
S S S
Audyssey DSX
®
S S S S S S S
z1 If “Audyssey DSX
®
” (vpage109) is set to “On”, the Audyssey DSX
®
effect is added to the sound mode marked with z1.
z2 This sound mode can be selected when “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Surround Back”.
z3 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” (vpage123) is set to “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” (vpage123) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z5 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage123) is set to “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z6 This sound mode can be selected when “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Front Height”.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
v See overleaf
DVD
147
Surround
Sound Mode (vpage71)
NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL Super Audio CD
PCM
(multi ch)
PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With no
Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY TrueHD
z1 F
DOLBY DIGITAL+
z1 F
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z2z3 S S S
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX
z2z3 S S
DOLBY DIGITAL
z1 F F F
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx CINEMA z2z4 S S S S S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC z2z3 S S S S S
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgz z5 S S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA z2z3 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC z2z3 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME z2z3 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz z5z6 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA z1 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC z1 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME z1 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
z1 S S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME A-DSX S S S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC A-DSX
S S S
Audyssey DSX
®
S S S S S
z1 If “Audyssey DSX
®
” (vpage109) is set to “On”, the Audyssey DSX
®
effect is added to the sound mode marked with z1.
z2 This sound mode can be selected when “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Surround Back”.
z3 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” (vpage123) is set to “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” (vpage123) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z5 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage123) is set to “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z6 This sound mode can be selected when “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Front Height”.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
v See overleaf
DVD
148
Surround
Sound Mode (vpage71)
NOTE
Input signal types and formats
ANALOG
PCM DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL Super Audio CD
PCM
(multi ch)
PCM
(2ch)
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS
EXPRESS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS 96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX
(With no Flag)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(5.1ch)
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
z1 F S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx CINEMA z2z4 S S
MULTI CH IN + PLgx MUSIC z2z3 S S
MULTI CH IN + PLgz z5z6 S S
MULTI CH IN + Dolby EX
z2z3 S S
MULTI CH IN 7.1
z2z3 F (7.1)
Audyssey DSX
®
S
DIRECT
DIRECT
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
DSD DIRECT
S S
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
DSP SIMULATION
MULTI CH STEREO
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
ROCK ARENA
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
JAZZ CLUB
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MONO MOVIE
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
VIDEO GAME
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
MATRIX
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
VIRTUAL
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
STEREO
STEREO
F S F S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
z1 If “Audyssey DSX
®
” (vpage109) is set to “On”, the Audyssey DSX
®
effect is added to the sound mode marked with z1.
z2 This sound mode can be selected when “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Surround Back”.
z3 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” (vpage123) is set to “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z4 If “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” (vpage123) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z5 If “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” (vpage123) is set to “None”, this sound mode cannot be selected.
z6 This sound mode can be selected when “Assign Mode” (vpage122) is set to “Front Height”.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
149
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT
Video Conversion
Input connector Output connector Menu displayed
HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO
On
A A A A
A
A
Only the menu is displayed
A
A
On
A A S S <VIDEO> S <VIDEO> S (VIDEO) A (VIDEO)
On
A S A
S <COMPONENT> S <COMPONENT>
A
S (COMPONENT) A (COMPONENT)
A
On
A S S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
On
S A A
S <HDMI>
A
A
S (HDMI)
A
A
On
S A S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
On
S S A
S <COMPONENT>
A
A (COMPONENT)
A
On
S S S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
Off
A A A
A
A
A
Only the menu is displayed
A
A
Off
A A S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
Off
A S A
S <COMPONENT>
A
A (COMPONENT)
A
Off
A S S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
Off
S A A
S <HDMI>
A
A
A
A
Off
S A S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
Off
S S A
S <COMPONENT>
A
A (COMPONENT)
A
Off
S S S S <VIDEO> A (VIDEO)
S : Video signal input present
A : No video signal input
S < > : The input signal between the < > marks is output.
A : No video signal output
S ( ) : Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ).
A ( ) : Only the picture in ( ) is output.
A : Neither the picture nor the menu is output.
The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
NOTE
•The status display screen cannot be displayed at a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or while certain 3D video contents is being played.
•When the menu is operated on a computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) or during playback of certain 3D video content, the playback image switches to the menu screen image.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
150
Video signal resolution conversion table
When “Video Conversion” (vpage113) is set to “On”, “i/p Scaler” (vpage114) is set to “Analog”, “Analog & HDMI” or “HDMI” are set, the resolution of the input video signal can be converted to a different
resolution for output (vpage6 “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”).
The relationship between the resolution of the convertible video signal and HDMI output resolution is shown in the table below.
HDMI Output
Output resolution
Input resolution
480i/576iz1
480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p 24Hz
4Kz2
Video input 480i/576i
S S S S S S S
Component video input
480i/576i
S S S S S S S
480p/576p
S S S S S S
1080i
S S S S S
720p
S S S S S
1080p
S S S
HDMI input
480i/576i
S S S S S S S
480p/576p
S S S S S S
1080i
S S S S S
720p
S S S S S
1080p 24Hz
Sz3 Sz4 S
1080p
S S S
4K
Sz5
S The resolution set in “Resolution” (vpage114) in the menu is output.
Output at the same resolution as the input video signal resolution.
z1 Only output when “i/p Scaler” in the menu is set to “Off”.
z2 Output at a resolution of 3840 x 2160 (24/25/30Hz).
z3 The resolution set in “Resolution” (vpage114) in the menu is set to “Auto”, and a television that does not support 1080p 24Hz video signals is
connected.
z4 The resolution set in “Resolution” (vpage114) in the menu is set to “Auto”, and a television that supports 1080p 24Hz video signals is connected.
z5 Output at the same resolution as the input video signal resolution.
NOTE
•Component video and Video output are output at the same resolution as the input video signal resolution.
•The 4K, 3D, Computer resolution, “x.v.Color”, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color or Adobe YCC601 color input to HDMI is output at the same resolution as the input video signal.
•When “Video Mode” in the menu is set to “Game” or “Auto” and game contents are played, the same resolution as the input video signal is output.
•When “Resolution” in the menu is set to “Auto”, the number of pixels in the television panel connected to the HDMI output connector is automatically detected, and the optimum resolution is output according to
the table above.
•If 1080p 24Hz signals input from the HDMI terminal are converted into 1080p 60Hz/1080p 50Hz for output, they are output according to the specified “Format” (vpage115) setting in the menu:
“NTSC” – Output as 1080p 60Hz.
“PAL” – Output as 1080p 50Hz.
•You can not convert 60Hz into 50Hz or vice versa.
•You can not convert 50Hz into 24Hz.
Relationship between video signals and monitor output
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
151
Explanation of terms
A
Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc.
Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can
produce more vivid and natural images.
AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes
or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible
device via the network.
App Store
App Store is a site that sells application software
for such devices as the iPhone or iPod Touch, and
is operated by Apple Inc.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating
sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into
account human perception and room acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
works in tandem with
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion
(A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX
®
is a scalable system that adds
new speakers to improve surround impression.
Starting with a 5.1 system Audyssey DSX
®
first
adds Wide channels for the biggest impact on
envelopment. Research in human hearing has
proven that information from the Wide channels is
much more critical in the presentation of a realistic
soundstage than the Back Surround channels found
in traditional 7.1 systems. Audyssey DSX
®
then
creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the
next most important acoustical and perceptual cues.
In addition to these new Wide and Height channels,
Audyssey DSX
®
applies Surround Envelopment
Processing to enhance the blend between the front
and surround channels.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large
variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft
and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic
EQ
®
is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as
the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround
impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT
MultEQ
®
XT is a room equalization solution
that calibrates any audio system so that it can
achieve optimum performance for every listener
in a large listening area. Based on several room
measurements, MultEQ
®
XT calculates an
equalization solution that corrects for both time
and frequency response problems in the listening
area and also performs a fully automated surround
system setup.
Auto Lip Sync
If you connect the unit to a TV that supports the
Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct
delay between the audio and video.
D
Deep Color
An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike
RGB, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can
use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or
16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher
definition.
Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep
Color.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/
or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
Some contents may not be compatible with other
DLNA CERTIFIED
®
products.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
A total of 5.1 channels are played: 3 front channels
(“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels
(“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between
channels and a realistic sound field with a “three-
dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement
and positioning) is achieved.
A realistic, powerful sense of presence is achieved
when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format
proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users
to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL
SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by
Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.
The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back
channels, provide improved sound positioning and
expression of space.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal
format that is compatible with up to 7.1 channels
of discrete digital sound and also improves sound
quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance.
It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby
Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to
the source signal and the conditions of the playback
device.
Dolby Pro Logic g
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into
5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into
stereo and full band signals (with a frequency
response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create
a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich
sense of presence for all stereo sources.
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of
the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded
to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1 channels.
There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing
music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and
“Game” which is optimized for playing games.
Dolby Pro Logic gz
Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to
Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair
of front height channels. Compatible with stereo,
5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro
Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth
and dimension to movies, concert video and video
game playback while maintaining the full integrity
of the source mix.
Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial
cues that occur naturally in all content, directing
this information to the front height channels,
complementing the performance of left and right
surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded
with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information
can be even more revealing, with perceptually
discrete height channel information bringing an
exciting new dimension to home entertainment.
Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is
also an ideal alternative for households that cannot
support the placement of back surround speakers
of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have
bookshelf space available to support the addition of
height speakers.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless
coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound
of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to
8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of
96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit
resolution. Dolby TrueHD is adopted for applications
that put very high importance on sound quality.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
152
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of
surround audio to less number of channels and
plays back.
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System,
which is a digital audio system developed by DTS.
When playing back audio by connecting this system
with a device such as DTS amplifier, accurate sound
field position and realistic sound effect as if you are
in a movie theater can be obtained.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high
sound quality playback in 5.1 channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround
format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling
frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1 channels
of digital discrete surround sound.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete
digital audio format adding a surround back (SB)
channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals
is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital
audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel
to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel
audio signals is also possible according to the
decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit
rates (max. 5.1 channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
Explanation of terms
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality
and enhanced functionality than the conventional
DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray
Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high
data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and
lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are
supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved
version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and
DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with
sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to
7.1 channels of discrete digital sound. High data
bit rate performance provides high quality sound.
This format is fully compatible with conventional
products, including conventional DTS digital
surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format
created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This
format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio
channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/
24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with
a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.
It is fully compatible with conventional products,
including conventional DTS digital surround
5.1-channel data.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology
for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback
with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6
Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS
NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted
sound level and the minimum discernible level
above the noise emitted by the device.
F
FLAC
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a
lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that
the audio is compressed without any loss in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,200
6,2007,2008,2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
•Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
•Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/
or other materials provided with the distribution.
•Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
H
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices,
this copyright protection technology encrypts
the signals to prevent content from being copied
without authorization.
HDMI
This is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can
be connected to a TV or amplifier. Video signal and
audio signal can be connected using 1 cable.
I
iTunes
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player
provided by Apple Inc. It enables management
and playback of multimedia contents including
music and movies. iTunes supports many main file
formats including AAC, WAV, and MP3.
L
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect,
which is an output channel that emphasizes
low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep
bass.
M
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the
MAIN ZONE .
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data
compression scheme, using the “MPEG-1” video
compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while
maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.
MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group),
MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format
standards used for the encoding of video and audio.
Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”, “MPEG-
2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2
Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
153
P
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of video signal that
displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared
to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and bleeding.
Protection Circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices
within the power supply when an abnormality
such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or
temperature for any reason.
In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit
enters standby mode when an abnormality occurs.
S
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave
(analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing
the height of the wave at each reading in digitized
format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is
called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the
value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω
(ohms). Greater power can be obtained with this
value smaller.
sYCC601 color
Like “x.v.Color”, each of these color spaces defines
a palette of available colors that is larger than the
traditional RGB color model.
V
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet
radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade
costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site
below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual
property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software
and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Nothing Else Matters Software and
BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
Explanation of terms
W
Windows Media DRM
This is a copyright protection technology developed
by Microsoft.
Content providers are using the digital rights
management technology for Windows Media
contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so
that their intellectual property, including copyright,
in such content is not misappropriated. This
device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure
Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of
the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft
revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire
new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure
Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM
Software’s ability to play unprotected content.
A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to
your device whenever you download a license for
Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license,
also download revocation list onto your device on
behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Windows Media Player Ver.11 or later
This is a media player distributed free of charge by
Microsoft Corporation.
It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of
Windows Media Player, as well as WMA, DRM
WMA, WAV, and other files.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows
Media
®
Player Ver.7, 7.1, Windows Media
®
Player
for Windows
®
XP and Windows Media
®
Player 9
Series.
To encode WMA files, only use applications
authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use
an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
X
x.v.Color
This function lets HDTVs display colors more
accurately. It enables display with natural,
vivid colors. “x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony
Corporation.
Z
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room
where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2
playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is called
ZONE2.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
154
Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,
there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
GGeneralH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Power does not turn
on.
•Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power
outlet.
•The protection circuit is active. Disconnect the power plug from
the electric outlet, wait 5 to 10 seconds and then insert it back
into the outlet.
33
153
Power automatically
switches to standby
mode.
•The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again, or change the
sleep timer settings.
•“Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set
amount of time. To disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby”
on the menu to “Off”.
92, 98
132
Display is off. •Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”.
132
The power indicator
is blinking red
in intervals of
approximately 2
seconds.
•Due to the temperature rise within this unit, the protection circuit
is working. Please turn off power once, and re-apply the power
after the temperature has fallen sufficiently.
•Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation.
The power indicator
is blinking red
in intervals of
approximately 0.5
seconds.
•Please use speakers which have the specified impedance.
•The protection circuit has been activated because the speaker
cable core wires are touching, a core wire has come loose from
the terminal, or a core wire is touching the rear panel of this unit.
After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as
firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the terminal, and
then reconnect the wire.
80
80
After turning on the
power, the power
indicator is blinking
red in intervals of
approximately 0.5
seconds.
•This unit amplifier circuit has failed. Turn off the power and please
contact the DENON service adviser.
Set does not operate
properly.
•Reset the microprocessor.
158
GHDMIH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No audio is
output with HDMI
connection.
•Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
•When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI
Audio Out” on the menu to “AVR”.
•When outputting HDMI audio from a TV, set “HDMI Audio Out”
on the menu to “TV”.
10
112
112
No video is
output with HDMI
connection.
•Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.
•Set the input source to match the connected HDMI connector.
•Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection
(HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video
will not be output correctly.
10
10, 33
11
When the following
operations are
performed on
devices compatible
with HDMI control,
the same operations
occur on this unit.
•Power ON/OFF
•Switching audio
output devices
•Adjust volume
•Switch input source
•Set “HDMI Control” in the menu to “Off”.
Furthermore, if you do not want to link the power off operation
with devices compatible with HDMI control, set “Power Off
Control” in the menu to “Off”.
91, 113
GVideoH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No picture appears. •Check the connection between the video output terminal of this
unit and the input terminal of the TV.
•Match the input settings to the input terminal of the TV connected
to this unit.
9, 13
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
155
GAudioH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Audio is not output. •Check the connections for all devices.
•Check the speaker connections and configurations.
•Check whether the audio device power is turned on.
•Adjust the master volume.
•Cancel the mute mode.
•Check the connection with the playback device and select the
proper input source.
•Match the input mode and the terminal assigned to be the digital
input terminal.
•Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the
speakers when headphones are connected.
9,10,13,14,
15,16,17,18,
19,20,21,24
81,82,83,84,
85,86,87,88
34, 98
34, 98
33, 98
119
137
The volume does not
increase.
•The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume
using “Limit”on the menu.
•Power for external devices connected to the output connectors
of the unit may not be turned on. Check the power of connected
external devices.
108
No sound is
produced from
surround speaker.
•Check if the surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND
terminals.
No sound is
produced from
surround back
speaker.
•Check if “Assign Mode” is set appropriately in order to output
audio from the surround back speakers.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Surr. Back” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
•Set the sound mode to something other than “STEREO” and
“VIRTUAL”.
122
123
71
No sound is
produced from front
height speaker.
•Check if “Assign Mode” is set appropriately in order to output
audio from the front height speakers.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
122
123
No sound is
produced from front
wide speaker.
•Check if “Assign Mode” is set appropriately in order to output
audio from the front wide speakers.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Front Wide” on the menu to something
other than “None”.
122
123
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
No sound is
produced from
subwoofer.
•Check the subwoofer connections.
•Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
•Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.
•If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”,
and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output
from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected
sound mode.
81,82,83,84,
85,86,87,88
122
122, 123
DTS sound is not
output.
•Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.
119
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-
HD, Dolby Digital
Plus audio is not
output.
•Make HDMI connections.
10
Dolby PLg mode or
DTS NEO:6 mode
cannot be selected.
•Check that “Speaker Config.” – “Center” or “Surround” is set to
other than “None”. If the speaker system is 2.0/2.1ch, this sound
mode cannot be selected.
•When headphones are used, Dolby PLg or DTS NEO:6 cannot be
selected.
122
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
and
Audyssey Dynamic
Volume
®
cannot be
selected.
•Switch the sound mode to other than “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
•When headphones are used, Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ
®
and Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
cannot be
selected.
71
Audyssey DSX
®
cannot be selected.
•Check that “Speaker Config.” – “Front Height” or “Front Wide” is
set to other than “None”.
•Check that “Speaker Config.” – “Center” is set to other than
“None”.
•Switch the sound mode to DOLBY listening mode or DTS listening
mode.
•When headphones are used, Audyssey DSX
®
cannot be selected.
123
122
71
Audyssey Dynamic
EQ
®
and Audyssey
Dynamic Volume
®
cannot be selected.
•Run Audyssey
®
Setup.
26, 89
“Restorer” cannot
be selected.
•Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate=44.1/48
kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby
Digital or DTS surround, “Restorer” cannot be used.
•Switch the sound mode to other than “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
107
71
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
156
GFMH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Reception fails, or
there is a lot of noise
or distortion.
•Change the antenna orientation or position.
•Use an FM outdoor antenna.
•Separate the antenna from other connection cables.
21
21
21
GiPod / USB memory device / Internet radio / Media server / Last.fm / FlickrH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
iPod cannot be
played.
•Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the
iPod/USB port.
19
The file names
are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
•Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a
malfunction. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed are
replaced with a “.” (period).
•Invalid tags are used for files within the USB memory device
connected to this unit. Use tags that are supported by this unit.
38
When a USB
memory device is
connected, “No
Connection” is
displayed.
•The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the
connection.
•This unit supports mass storage class and MTP-compatible USB
memory devices. It will not recognize other USB memory devices.
•A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.
This is not a malfunction. DENON does not guarantee that all USB
memory devices will operate or receive power.
•USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB
memory device directly to the iPod/USB port.
•The unit supports file structures with up to 8 levels and a total
maximum of 5000 subfolders and files per 1 folder. Change the
file structure of the USB memory device if necessary.
19
38
Files on a USB
memory device
cannot be played.
•The USB memory device format should be set to FAT16 or
FAT32. For details, refer to the USB memory device’s operating
instructions.
•If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only
files in partition one can be played.
•Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a
compatible format.
•You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
38
38
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
Internet radio cannot
be played.
•Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is
disconnected. Check the connection status.
•Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only
Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this
unit.
•The firewall of the PC or router has been activated. Check the
firewall settings of the connected PC or router.
•Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station
that is currently broadcasting.
•IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
•Some radio stations may go silent at certain times of the day. In
this case, no audio is output even when a station is received. Try
again later, or switch to another radio station.
24
52
52
127
Files stored on a
computer cannot be
played.
•Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible
format.
•You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files
that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit.
•Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s iPod/
USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.
•Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing
settings so that the unit can access the folders on your computer.
55
55
56
Music stored on
a NAS cannot be
played.
•If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable
the DLNA server function in the NAS setting.
•If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard,
play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Player’s media
sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
•If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection
target.
56
Server is not found,
or it is not possible
to connect to the
server.
•The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the
computer’s or router’s firewall settings.
•Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.
•Server is not running. Launch the server.
•Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.
127
Cannot connect to
preset or favorite
radio stations.
•Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before
trying again.
•Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to
connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.
A list of broadcasting
stations is not
displayed.
•Connection to the network is unstable. Reconnect to the network
or redo the “Network” setting in the menu.
24, 128
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
v See overleaf
DVD
157
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
For some radio
stations, “Radio
station server full” or
“Connection down”
is displayed and
station cannot be
connected to.
•Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while
before trying again.
Sound is broken
during playback.
•Network or USB memory device’s signal transfer speed is slow
or communications lines or radio station is congested. This is not
a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate,
the sound may be broken, depending on the communications
conditions.
Sound quality is poor
or noise is heard
during play.
•File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction.
GAirPlayH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The AirPlay icon
is not displayed
in iTunes or on the
iPhone/iPod touch/
iPad.
•This unit and the computer or iPhone/iPod touch/iPad are not
connected to the same network (LAN). Connect the computer or
iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to the same network as this unit.
•iTunes or the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad do not have firmware that
supports AirPlay installed. Update to the latest firmware.
24
134
No sound. •The volume in iTunes or on the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad is set to
the minimum setting. Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
•This unit is not selected in the screen that is displayed when
iTunes or the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad is started. Start iTunes or
switch on the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, click the AirPlay icon
in
the displayed screen, and select this unit.
•AirPlay playback has not started. Click the 1 button in iTunes or
press the 1 button on the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad.
69
When using AirPlay
with the iPhone/
iPod touch/iPad, the
sound suffers from
intermittent breaks
or AirPlay does not
function.
•Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay.
•When playing via a wireless connection, outside conditions may
affect the unit. To remedy this, change the network environment,
e.g. shorten the distance to the wireless LAN access point.
•Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad application or iTunes to the
latest version.
GRemote control unitH
Symptom Cause/Solution Page
The set cannot be
operated with the
remote control unit.
•Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.
•Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about
7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.
•Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control
unit.
•Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and
w marks.
•The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct
sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set
to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed
to strong light.
•The setting of the zone to operate does not match. Press
MAIN or
ZONE2 to select the zone to operate.
141
141
141
141
141
27, 98
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
158
Resetting the microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.
X
TUNER PRESET CH +
TUNER PRESET CH –
1
Turn off the power using X.
2
Press X while simultaneously pressing TUNER PRESET CH + and TUNER PRESET
CH –
.
3
Once the display starts ashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two
buttons.
If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
159
Specifications
n Audio section
•Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:
105 W + 105 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)
135 W + 135 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
105 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)
135 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
105 W + 105 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)
135 W + 135 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back:
105 W + 105 W (8 Ω, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.08 % T.H.D.)
135 W + 135 W (6 Ω, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Output connectors: 6 – 16 Ω
•Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
S/N: 100 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
•Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
n Video section
•Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB
•Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω
P
B / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
P
R / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB
n Tuner section [FM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω, 0 dBf = 1 x 10
–15
W)
Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz
Usable Sensitivity: 1.2 μV (12.8 dBf)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 2.8 μV (20.2 dBf)
S/N : MONO 70 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
STEREO 67 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
Total harmonic Distortion: MONO 0.7 % (1 kHz)
STEREO 1.0 % (1 kHz)
n General
Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 600 W
Power consumption in standby mode: 0.1 W
Power consumption in CEC standby mode: 0.5 W
Power consumption in network standby mode: 2.7 W
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
160
v Numerics
2.1-channel ························································· 87
3D ······································································· 11
5.1-channel ··················································· 79, 85
6.1-channel ··················································· 79, 84
7.1-channel ································· 78, 79, 81, 82, 83
v A
Accessories ·························································· 2
Add New Feature ············································· 135
Adjust EQ ························································· 110
Adjusting the master volume ····························· 34
Adobe RGB color / Adobe YCC601 color ········· 151
AirPlay ························································ 69, 151
Amp Assign ······················································ 122
App Store ························································· 151
ARC ······································································ 8
Aspect Ratio ····················································· 114
Audio ························································ 104, 115
Audio Delay ······················································ 108
Audio Display ··················································· 115
Audyssey ·························································· 108
Audyssey DSX
®
··············································· 109
Audyssey Dynamic EQ
®
·························· 109, 151
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion ·········· 151
Audyssey Dynamic Volume
®
··················· 109, 151
Audyssey MultEQ
®
XT ···························· 108, 151
Audyssey
®
Setup ········································ 26, 89
Auto Lip Sync ··········································· 112, 151
Auto Preset Memory ·········································· 44
Auto Standby ···················································· 132
v B
Bass ················································· 107, 123, 131
Bi-amp ································································ 88
Brightness ························································ 112
Browse mode ··············································· 35, 36
v C
Cable
Audio cable ······················································ 12
Coaxial digital cable·········································· 12
Component video cable ··································· 12
Ethernet cable·················································· 12
HDMI cable ·················································· 9, 10
Optical cable ···················································· 12
Speaker cable ········ 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88
Subwoofer cable ···· 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88
Video cable ······················································ 12
Center Image ··················································· 105
Center Width ···················································· 105
Channel ···························································· 131
Characters ························································ 103
Cinema EQ ······················································· 105
Condensation ······················································· 3
Connection
Blu-ray Disc player ····································· 10, 16
Cable TV··························································· 14
CD player ························································· 20
Digital camcorder ······································· 10, 17
DVD player ················································· 10, 15
External power amplifier ·································· 22
FM ··································································· 21
Game console ·················································· 10
HDMI ································································· 7
Home network (LAN) ······································· 24
iPod (USB)························································ 19
Media player ·············································· 10, 18
Power cord ······················································ 25
REMOTE CONTROL ········································ 23
RS-232C ··························································· 23
Satellite tuner··················································· 14
Set-top box ················································ 10, 14
Speaker ···························································· 80
TV································································· 9, 13
USB memory device ········································ 19
Content Type ······················································ 11
Contrast ···························································· 112
Control Monitor ················································ 113
Crossovers ······················································· 125
Curve Copy ······················································· 110
v D
Decode Mode ·················································· 119
Deep Color ················································· 11, 151
Delay Time ······················································· 106
Dialogue ··························································· 107
Dialogue Level ·················································· 107
Dimension ························································ 105
Dimmer ···························································· 132
Direct Tune ························································· 43
Display ······························································ 138
Distances ························································· 124
DLNA ································································ 151
Dolby
Dolby Digital············································· 75, 151
Dolby Digital EX ······································· 75, 151
Dolby Digital Plus ····································· 75, 151
Dolby Pro Logic················································ 75
Dolby Pro Logic II····································· 75, 151
Dolby Pro Logic IIx ··································· 75, 151
Dolby Pro Logic IIz ··································· 75, 151
Dolby TrueHD ·········································· 75, 151
Downmix ·························································· 152
DTS ·································································· 152
DTS 96/24 ················································ 75, 152
DTS Digital Surround ····································· 152
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 ································ 75, 152
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ··································· 75, 152
DTS Express ············································ 75, 152
DTS-HD ···················································· 75, 152
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ····················· 152
DTS-HD Master Audio ··································· 152
DTS NEO:6™ Surround ··························· 75, 152
Dynamic Compression ····································· 105
Dynamic EQ ····················································· 109
Dynamic range ················································· 152
Dynamic Volume ·············································· 109
v E
Edit Name ························································ 127
Effect Level ······················································ 106
Enhancer ·························································· 112
Error messages (Audyssey
®
Setup) ·················· 31
v F
Favorite Memory ················································ 67
Firmware ·························································· 134
FLAC ································································ 152
Flickr ····························································· 59, 63
FM ······································································ 41
FM indoor antenna ············································· 21
Format ······························································ 115
Friendly Name ·················································· 127
Front A/B (connection) ································· 79, 86
Front Display ···················································· 132
Front Height ····················································· 123
Front height speaker ···································· 79, 82
Front Panel ······················································· 137
Front Speaker Setup ········································ 125
Front Wide ······················································· 123
Front wide speaker ······································ 79, 83
v G
General ····························································· 130
Graphic EQ ······················································· 110
v H
HDCP ························································· 11, 152
HDMI ······················································ 7, 11, 152
HDMI Audio Out ·············································· 112
HDMI Control ············································· 91, 113
HDMI Setup ····················································· 112
Headphones ····················································· 137
Height Gain ······················································ 106
Hide Sources ···················································· 119
High Pass Filter ················································ 131
Hue ··································································· 112
v I
Info Display ······················································ 115
Information ··············································· 127, 133
Audio······························································ 133
Firmware························································ 133
Video ······························································ 133
ZONE ····························································· 133
Input Assign ····················································· 117
Input Mode ······················································· 119
Inputs ······························································· 116
Input Select ······················································ 119
Input signal ······················································· 146
Inputting characters ········································· 103
IP Control ························································· 127
i/p Scaler ··························································· 114
iTunes ······························································· 152
v L
Language ·························································· 131
Last.fm ························································· 59, 60
Last.fm Display ················································ 129
Lch Level ·························································· 131
Levels ······························································· 124
LFE ··································································· 152
Limit ································································· 108
Listening mode ·················································· 71
Listening position ··············································· 26
Lock ·································································· 135
Loudness Management ··································· 105
Low Frequency Effects ···································· 105
v M
Maintenance Mode ·········································· 129
MAIN ZONE ····················································· 152
Manual Setup ··················································· 122
Menu map ·························································· 99
Mode ································································ 107
MP3 ·································································· 152
MPEG ······························································· 152
MultEQ
®
XT ····················································· 108
Mute Level ··············································· 108, 131
v N
Network ····················································· 32, 126
Noise Reduction ··············································· 112
Notifications ····················································· 134
Index
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
161
v O
On-screen Info ················································· 115
Operation Mode ················································· 36
Output Settings ················································ 113
v P
Panorama ························································· 105
Parameter Check ················································ 32
Picture Adjust ··················································· 112
Picture View ······················································· 68
Playback
Blu-ray Disc player ··········································· 34
CD player ························································· 35
Direct ························································· 71, 76
DVD player ······················································· 34
FLAC ·························································· 38, 55
Flickr ································································ 63
FM ··································································· 41
Internet radio ··················································· 52
iPod (USB)························································ 35
JPEG ·························································· 38, 55
Last.fm······················································· 59, 60
MP3 ····················································· 38, 52, 55
MPEG-4 AAC ············································· 38, 55
NAS·································································· 55
Original listening mode ···································· 76
PC ···································································· 55
PTY ·································································· 49
Pure direct ················································· 71, 76
Radio Text ························································ 51
RDS·································································· 48
Stereo ······························································ 76
Super Audio CD ··············································· 34
TP····································································· 50
USB memory device ········································ 38
WAV··························································· 38, 55
WMA ··················································· 38, 52, 55
ZONE2 ····························································· 98
Power Off Control ············································ 113
Power On Level ··············································· 108
Power On Volume ············································ 131
Preset Memory ·················································· 45
Preset Name ······················································ 46
Preset Skip ························································· 47
Progressive ······················································ 153
Progressive Mode ············································ 114
Protection circuit ·············································· 153
PTY ····································································· 49
v Q
Quick select ······················································· 93
Quick Select Names ········································· 132
v R
Radio Text ·························································· 51
Random ························································ 37, 66
Rch Level ························································· 131
RDS ···································································· 48
Rear panel ························································ 139
REC OUT mode ·················································· 94
Reference Level Offset ···································· 109
Remote control setting ································ 27, 89
Remote control unit ········································· 140
Inserting the batteries···································· 141
Remote mode ·············································· 35, 36
Remove Favorites ·············································· 68
Repeat ·························································· 37, 66
Resetting the microprocessor ·························· 158
Resolution ························································ 114
Restorer ··························································· 107
Room Size ························································ 106
v S
Sampling frequency ········································· 153
Saturation ························································· 112
Scale ································································· 108
Selecting the input source ································· 33
Settings ···························································· 128
Setup Lock ······················································· 135
Sleep timer ··················································· 92, 98
Slideshow ··························································· 68
Sound Mode ··············································· 71, 143
Source Level ···················································· 119
Source Rename ················································ 118
Speaker
Connect ··························································· 80
Install ······························································· 78
Set up ························································ 26, 89
Speaker Config. ················································ 122
Speaker impedance ···································· 80, 153
Speakers ·························································· 121
Speaker Selection ············································ 110
Stage Height ···················································· 109
Stage Width ····················································· 109
Standby Source ················································ 113
Subwoofer ························································ 107
Subwoofer Level ·············································· 107
Subwoofer setting ·············································· 27
Surr. Back ························································· 123
Surround back speaker ····················· 78, 79, 81, 84
Surround Parameter ········································· 105
sYCC601 color ·················································· 153
v T
Text Search ························································ 65
Tone ································································· 107
Tone Control ····················································· 107
TP ······································································· 50
Trademark ························································ 142
Treble ······················································· 107, 131
Trigger Out ······················································· 132
Troubleshooting ··············································· 154
Tune Mode ························································· 42
Turning off the sound temporarily ······················ 34
Turning the power on ········································· 33
TV Format ························································· 115
v U
Update ······························································ 134
v V
Video ································································ 111
Video conversion ·················································· 6
Video Conversion ············································· 113
Video Mode ······················································ 113
Video Output ···················································· 112
Video Source ···················································· 120
Volume ····················································· 108, 114
Volume Display ················································ 114
Volume Level ··················································· 131
Volume Limit ···················································· 131
vTuner ························································ 54, 153
v W
Web control ························································ 95
Windows Media DRM ······································ 153
Windows Media Player ···································· 153
WMA ································································ 153
v X
x.v.Color ··························································· 153
v Z
ZONE2 ················································ 97, 138, 153
ZONE2 Setup ··················································· 131
Zone Rename ··················································· 131
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
162
Dimensions
Unit : mm
338.5
379.0
214.554.0 70.0
15.0 152.0
167.0
434.0
344.0
60.0
45.045.0
18.5 22.0
Weight : 10.9 kg
Basic version
Advanced version
InformationsInformations
DVD
D&M Holdings Inc.
3520 10082 00AD
V00
www.denon.com
150

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Denon-AVR-2313

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Denon AVR-2313 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Denon AVR-2313 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 34,62 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Denon AVR-2313

Denon AVR-2313 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 166 pagina's

Denon AVR-2313 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 166 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info